You are on page 1of 272

Promina

800 Series
Release 3.x3
P r o mi n a 8 0 0
I n s t a l l a t i o n a n d
M a i n t e n a n c e
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Part Number 033720-303 Rev. A
Issued September 2004
NETWORK EQUIPMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC., d.b.a. net.com (net.com) PROVIDES
THIS DOCUMENT AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
This document constitutes the sole Specifications referred to in net.com's Product Warranty for
the products or services described herein. net.com's Product Warranty is subject to all the
conditions, restrictions, and limitations contained herein and in the applicable contract. net.com
has made reasonable efforts to verify that the information in this document is accurate, but
net.com reserves the right to correct typographical errors or technical inaccuracies. net.com
assumes no responsibility for any use of the use of the information contained in this document or
for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties that may result. Networking
products cannot be tested in all possible uses, configurations or implementations, and
interpretability with other products cannot be guaranteed. The customer is solely responsible for
verifying the suitability of net.com's products for use in its network. Local market variations
may apply. This document is subject to change by net.com without notice as additional
information is incorporated by net.com or as changes are made by net.com to hardware or
software.
Copyright 2004 Network Equipment Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system, transmitted or reproduced in any
way, including, but not limited to, photocopy, photograph, magnetic, or other record, without the
prior written permission of net.com.
U.S. Government
Rights
The software accompanying this documentation is furnished under a license and may only be used
in accordance with the terms of such license. This documentation is commercial computer
software documentation as that term is used in 48 CFR 12.212. Unless otherwise agreed, use,
duplication, or disclosure of this documentation and any related software by U.S. Government
civilian agencies is subject to restrictions as set forth in 48 CFR 52.227-14 (ALT III) and 48 CFR
52.227-19, and use, duplication, or disclosure by DoD is subject to restrictions as set forth in 48
CFR 227.7202-1(a) and 48 CFR 227.7202-3(a) or, if applicable, 48 CFR 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii)
(OCT 1988).
Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Network Equipment Technologies, Inc./N.E.T. Federal, Inc., d.b.a. net.com
6900 Paseo Padre Parkway
Fremont, CA 94555
Trademarks IDNX, the N.E.T. logo, PrimeSwitch, and Promina are registered trademarks, and CellXpress,
FrameXpress, Frame Relay Exchange, ISDNX, LAN/WAN Exchange, Network Equipment
Technologies, NetOpen, net.com, the net.com logo, net.com, PanaVue, PortExtender,
PrimeVideo, PrimeVoice, SCREAM, SCREAM200, SCREAMVUE, SONET Transmission
Manager, STM, and SPX are trademarks of Network Equipment Technologies, Inc. All other
trademarks are the sole property of their respective companies.
Note: In this manual, any reference to Promina refers to the Promina 800 Series product line,
unless specified differently.
Note: In this manual, any reference to SCREAMVUE refers to the SCREAM product line, unless
specified differently.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 iii
Cont ent s
Preface.......................................................................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ............................................................................................................... iii-xv
Technical Assistance Information ...........................................................................................iii-xviii
Chapter 1 Promi na Systems Overvi ew
The Promina Network .................................................................................................................... 1-2
Private Networks ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
Interface and Device Compatibility ......................................................................................... 1-4
Hardware Features ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Physical Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 1-5
Call Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Network Management .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Chapter 2 Standard Equi pment Modul es
Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Promina Controller Modules Overview ................................................................................... 2-3
Promina 800 Standard Equipment Configuration .......................................................................... 2-4
Standard and Expansion Shelves ....................................................................................... 2-5
High-Speed Shelf (HSS) .................................................................................................... 2-5
SX-2 Port-to-Shelf Configuration ...................................................................................... 2-5
Promina Standard Equipment Connectivity .................................................................................. 2-6
Promina 800 Node Standard Equipment Redundancy .................................................................. 2-7
Domain and System Redundancy ............................................................................................ 2-7
Nonredundant Configurations .................................................................................................. 2-8
Timing Sources ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
Chapter 3 Card Descri pti ons
Promina 800 standard Equipment Modules ................................................................................... 3-2
PPM Module ............................................................................................................................ 3-2
Master and Coprocessor Functions .................................................................................... 3-3
PPM Front Panel ................................................................................................................ 3-3
PPMI Card ............................................................................................................................... 3-5
SX-2 Module ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
SX-2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................... 3-6
SXI-2 Card ............................................................................................................................... 3-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SXI-2 Connectors .............................................................................................................. 3-8
SBI Card ................................................................................................................................ 3-10
BX Front Panel ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
BXI Connectors ..................................................................................................................... 3-12
Promina Server Module ......................................................................................................... 3-13
PSM Redundancy ............................................................................................................ 3-13
PSM Front Panel .............................................................................................................. 3-14
Promina Server Module Interface .......................................................................................... 3-16
Bus Terminator ...................................................................................................................... 3-18
Dial-in Access Modem ................................................................................................................ 3-19
Chapter 4 Software Confi gurati on
Card Installation ............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Card Installation After Node Initialization .............................................................................. 4-2
Standard Equipment Parameters .................................................................................................... 4-6
Processor Card Parameters ...................................................................................................... 4-6
[0] Alarm/Monitor Interface .............................................................................................. 4-6
[5] PPP on Aux Port ........................................................................................................... 4-6
[6] PPP Baud Rate ............................................................................................................. 4-7
[7] PPP Local IP ................................................................................................................ 4-7
[8] PPP Remote IP ............................................................................................................. 4-7
[9] PPP TyCo Device ......................................................................................................... 4-7
[10] MTU Size ................................................................................................................... 4-7
PSM Card Parameters .............................................................................................................. 4-7
[0/1] Console/Auxiliary Baud Rate ................................................................................... 4-7
[2] External IP .................................................................................................................... 4-8
[4] Subnet Mask ................................................................................................................. 4-8
[5/6] PSM1/2 Assigned CardID ......................................................................................... 4-8
[10] PPP on Aux Port ......................................................................................................... 4-8
[11] PPP Baud Rate ........................................................................................................... 4-9
[12] PPP Local IP .............................................................................................................. 4-9
[13] PPP Remote IP ........................................................................................................... 4-9
[14] PPP TyCo Device ....................................................................................................... 4-9
[15] MTU Size ................................................................................................................... 4-9
Card Query Displays .................................................................................................................... 4-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 v
Processor Card Configurations .............................................................................................. 4-10
Card Configuration Descriptions ........................................................................................... 4-12
Alarm Panel I/F ................................................................................................................ 4-12
Auxiliary Port Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-12
Bytes of RAM Left .......................................................................................................... 4-12
CBUS Interrupts/Sec ........................................................................................................ 4-12
Code Version ................................................................................................................... 4-12
Console Port Configuration ............................................................................................. 4-12
CPU Restart Count ........................................................................................................... 4-13
CPU Status ....................................................................................................................... 4-13
Current GMT ................................................................................................................... 4-13
DB Checksum .................................................................................................................. 4-13
DB Status ......................................................................................................................... 4-13
External IP ....................................................................................................................... 4-14
Gateway IP Addr ............................................................................................................. 4-14
HW Revision .................................................................................................................... 4-14
HW Serial No ................................................................................................................... 4-14
Idle Time (%) ................................................................................................................... 4-14
Internal IP (Address) ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Internal IP Addr ............................................................................................................... 4-14
Load Units ........................................................................................................................ 4-14
Local IP ............................................................................................................................ 4-14
MAC Addr ....................................................................................................................... 4-15
Master CPU ...................................................................................................................... 4-15
MTU Size ......................................................................................................................... 4-15
Number of Installed SSC Ports ........................................................................................ 4-15
Perm Boot Version ........................................................................................................... 4-15
Power Up ......................................................................................................................... 4-15
PPP Baud Rate ................................................................................................................. 4-15
PSM Card ID ................................................................................................................... 4-15
Remote IP ........................................................................................................................ 4-15
Restart .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
RTC Overruns .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Serial Number .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Slot Type .......................................................................................................................... 4-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Status ................................................................................................................................ 4-16
Subnet Mask .................................................................................................................... 4-16
Task Distribution ............................................................................................................. 4-16
Task Restart Count ........................................................................................................... 4-17
TyCo Device .................................................................................................................... 4-17
Wrt Boot Version ............................................................................................................. 4-17
Query PSM Displays ................................................................................................................... 4-18
PSM Card Configuration Descriptions .................................................................................. 4-19
Database ........................................................................................................................... 4-19
Ext IP Addr ...................................................................................................................... 4-19
Int IP Addr ....................................................................................................................... 4-19
PSM Code ........................................................................................................................ 4-19
MAC Addr ....................................................................................................................... 4-19
Status ................................................................................................................................ 4-19
SX-2 Card Configuration ............................................................................................................. 4-20
Active Domain ................................................................................................................. 4-20
DB Status ......................................................................................................................... 4-20
Domain ............................................................................................................................. 4-20
Firmware Revision ........................................................................................................... 4-21
Redundant SX .................................................................................................................. 4-21
Serial Number .................................................................................................................. 4-21
Slot Type .......................................................................................................................... 4-21
Status ................................................................................................................................ 4-21
System Components ........................................................................................................ 4-21
BX Card Configuration ................................................................................................................ 4-22
Active Domain ................................................................................................................. 4-22
DB Status ......................................................................................................................... 4-22
Domain ............................................................................................................................. 4-22
Serial Number .................................................................................................................. 4-22
Slot Type .......................................................................................................................... 4-22
Status ................................................................................................................................ 4-23
Redundant BX .................................................................................................................. 4-23
SX-2 Port ......................................................................................................................... 4-23
Console Port Settings ................................................................................................................... 4-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 vii
Chapter 5 SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
SSC Ports on the PPM, PLM, and IPLM ....................................................................................... 5-1
TBus Allocation ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
HTC Ports and SNMP Manageability ........................................................................................... 5-4
SSC Port Installation ..................................................................................................................... 5-5
SSC Port Parameters ................................................................................................................ 5-7
[0] Orig/Ans Mode ............................................................................................................. 5-7
[1] Destination Port ............................................................................................................ 5-8
[2] Call/Preempt Priority ................................................................................................... 5-8
[3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority .................................................................................. 5-9
[4] Port Type ...................................................................................................................... 5-9
[5] Port Speed .................................................................................................................... 5-9
[7] Routing Options ........................................................................................................... 5-9
[8] Selected Path ................................................................................................................ 5-9
[10] Selected Path Required ............................................................................................ 5-10
[11] IP Only ..................................................................................................................... 5-10
HTC Port Installation ................................................................................................................... 5-11
HTC Port Parameters ............................................................................................................. 5-14
[0] Orig/Ans Mode ........................................................................................................... 5-15
[1] Destination Port .......................................................................................................... 5-15
[2] Call/Preempt Priority ................................................................................................. 5-15
[3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority ................................................................................ 5-15
[4] Port Type .................................................................................................................... 5-15
[5] Port Speed .................................................................................................................. 5-16
[7] Routing Options ......................................................................................................... 5-16
[8] Selected Path .............................................................................................................. 5-16
[10] Selected Path Required ............................................................................................ 5-16
[12] IP .............................................................................................................................. 5-16
[13] Master-only .............................................................................................................. 5-17
SCLP/SSC Port Query Displays .................................................................................................. 5-18
PPM, PLM,
and IPLM Configurations ...................................................................................................... 5-18
Port Configuration Descriptions ............................................................................................ 5-19
ATM Routing ................................................................................................................... 5-19
Call Priority ...................................................................................................................... 5-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Call State .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
Card Status ....................................................................................................................... 5-20
Card Type ........................................................................................................................ 5-20
Destination Port ............................................................................................................... 5-20
Encry Routing .................................................................................................................. 5-20
Fiber Routing ................................................................................................................... 5-20
Installed Port .................................................................................................................... 5-20
Last Disconnect ................................................................................................................ 5-20
Link Status ....................................................................................................................... 5-21
Orig/Ans Mode ................................................................................................................ 5-21
Pkts Recvd ....................................................................................................................... 5-21
Pkts Sent .......................................................................................................................... 5-21
Port Speed ........................................................................................................................ 5-21
Port Status ........................................................................................................................ 5-21
Port Type .......................................................................................................................... 5-22
Preempt Prty .................................................................................................................... 5-22
SCLX Routing ................................................................................................................. 5-22
Sec Call Priority ............................................................................................................... 5-22
Sec Prmt Priority .............................................................................................................. 5-22
Terr Routing ..................................................................................................................... 5-22
HTC Port Query Displays ............................................................................................................ 5-23
Chapter 6 Promi na 800 System
Promina 800 Configurations .......................................................................................................... 6-2
STS Shelf ................................................................................................................................. 6-2
EXS Shelf ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
System Hardware ........................................................................................................................... 6-3
Configuration Specifications ......................................................................................................... 6-4
Load Units ................................................................................................................................ 6-4
Logical Slots ............................................................................................................................ 6-5
Module Power Consumption ................................................................................................... 6-5
Electrical and Environmental Specifications ........................................................................... 6-6
Physical Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
Rack-mount System ................................................................................................................. 6-9
Cabinet-
mounted Systems ..................................................................................................................... 6-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 ix
Cabinet Grounding ........................................................................................................... 6-14
Promina 800 Shelves ................................................................................................................... 6-15
Shelf Configurations .............................................................................................................. 6-15
Optional Cabinet Equipment ................................................................................................. 6-15
Shelf and Slot Numbering ...................................................................................................... 6-16
Slot Restrictions ............................................................................................................... 6-17
HSS-2 Shelf ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
HSS-2 Shelf Door ............................................................................................................ 6-18
HSS-2 Backplane ............................................................................................................. 6-19
STS Shelf ............................................................................................................................... 6-22
STS Shelf Front Panel ...................................................................................................... 6-22
STS Backplane ................................................................................................................. 6-25
Setting the STS Backplane Jumper .................................................................................. 6-26
EXS Shelf .............................................................................................................................. 6-27
EXS Backplane ................................................................................................................ 6-27
Setting the EXS Backplane Jumper ................................................................................. 6-28
Power Supplies ............................................................................................................................ 6-29
System Power and BTU Output ............................................................................................. 6-29
Power Distribution Units ............................................................................................................. 6-30
Cabinet/Rack Mounted PDUs ................................................................................................ 6-30
-48 and -60 V DC PDU .................................................................................................... 6-30
Connection to DC Power Source ..................................................................................... 6-35
100 to 240 V AC PDU ..................................................................................................... 6-38
HSS-2 PDUs .......................................................................................................................... 6-42
-48 and -60 V DC PDU (dual feed) ................................................................................. 6-42
100 to 240 V AC PDU (Dual Feed) ................................................................................. 6-43
STS PDUs .............................................................................................................................. 6-44
-48 and -60 V DC Single/Dual Feed PDU ....................................................................... 6-44
Connection to DC Power Source ..................................................................................... 6-46
100 to 240 V AC PDU ..................................................................................................... 6-49
Fan Tray Assemblies ................................................................................................................... 6-50
Alarm Panel/Auxiliary Fan Assembly ................................................................................... 6-50
Jackfield Fan Assembly ......................................................................................................... 6-51
Intake Fan Assembly ............................................................................................................. 6-51
Thermostatic Controlled Fan Assembly ................................................................................ 6-52
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Standard Equipment Modules ...................................................................................................... 6-53
HSS-2 Shelf Modules ............................................................................................................ 6-54
Reserved Card Slots ............................................................................................................... 6-55
System Redundancy ............................................................................................................... 6-56
Promina Processor Module .............................................................................................. 6-57
Promina Server Module ................................................................................................... 6-58
STS Shelf Modules ................................................................................................................ 6-58
STS Feature Modules ....................................................................................................... 6-59
EXS Shelf Modules ............................................................................................................... 6-60
Chapter 7 Promi na System Components
Power Supplies .............................................................................................................................. 7-2
250 W Power Supplies ............................................................................................................. 7-2
Maximum Output Currents ................................................................................................ 7-5
Power Supply Specifications ............................................................................................. 7-5
400 W Power Supplies ............................................................................................................. 7-5
Maximum Output Currents ................................................................................................ 7-9
Power Supply Specifications ............................................................................................. 7-9
Aux Power Supply Tray .............................................................................................................. 7-10
Fan Trays ............................................................................................................................... 7-11
Wattage and BTU Output ............................................................................................................ 7-12
Module Power Consumption ....................................................................................................... 7-13
Load Units .................................................................................................................................... 7-17
Logical Slots ................................................................................................................................ 7-18
Logical SlotsPort Speeds ........................................................................................................... 7-20
Minimum Load Board ................................................................................................................. 7-21
System Load Current Requirements ...................................................................................... 7-22
Configuration Requirements .................................................................................................. 7-23
Bus Cards ............................................................................................................................... 7-23
T1 Jackfield .................................................................................................................................. 7-24
Alarm Panel Assembly ................................................................................................................ 7-25
Front Alarm Panel-2 .................................................................................................................... 7-26
Alarm Panel-2 Connections ................................................................................................... 7-26
Rear Alarm Connectors ................................................................................................... 7-27
Serial Port Interface ..................................................................................................................... 7-28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 xi
Cross Connects ...................................................................................................................... 7-29
Baud Rates ............................................................................................................................. 7-29
Serial Port Pinouts ................................................................................................................. 7-29
Determining Bandwidth ............................................................................................................... 7-32
Transparent Signaling Overhead ........................................................................................... 7-32
Trunk Asynchronous Bandwidth ........................................................................................... 7-32
Pass-Through Timing ............................................................................................................ 7-32
Synchronous Timing .............................................................................................................. 7-32
Chapter 8 Operator I nterface Commands
Expert Mode Command Summary ................................................................................................ 8-2
Appendi x A Card I nstal l ati on
Module Installation Requirements ................................................................................................ A-2
Load Units ............................................................................................................................... A-2
Logical Slots ........................................................................................................................... A-2
Promina 800 Card Installation ...................................................................................................... A-3
Interface Card Installation ............................................................................................................ A-5
Installing an Interface Card in an HSS-2 ................................................................................ A-5
Installing an Interface Card in an STS or an EXS .................................................................. A-5
Rear Interface Card Replacement ................................................................................................. A-9
Front Card Installation ................................................................................................................ A-10
Front Card Replacement ............................................................................................................. A-12
Connecting Interface Cards .................................................................................................. A-13
Installing Front Cards ........................................................................................................... A-13
Replacing Front Cards .......................................................................................................... A-13
Appendi x B PanaVue Conf i gurati on for HTC Port Use
Typical Ethernet-Based Configuration ..........................................................................................B-2
HTC Configuration ..................................................................................................................B-3
Index..................................................................................................................................................1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 xiii
Pr ef ace
About This Document
This document is for use in the installation and management of Promina
800 Series nodes. It provides information about standard equipment
modules and how to install standard equipment cards in the configuration
database.
Before using this document the reader should have a working knowledge
of data communications, and basic trunking and transmission concepts.
The user also needs to be aware of the hazards associated with electronic
equipment and electricity, a detailed discussion of which is beyond the
scope of this document.
This document provides screen displays as examples of output from the
Operator Interface. Because the displayed information is dependent on
each nodes configuration, the examples may not correspond exactly to
the information displayed by another node. Differences in software
releases can also account for differences in displayed information.
Document Organization
The document contains the following sections:
Section Title Description
Chapter 1 Promina Systems
Overview
Provides an overview of the Promina systems.
Chapter 2 Standard Equipment
Modules
Provides basic information about the standard
equipment modules in Promina 800
Chapter 3 Card Descriptions Describes the standard equipment modules
and includes illustrations of the front panel
and rear cards with information on front panel
components and rear card ports.
Chapter 4 Software Configuration Describes installing standard equipment cards
in the configuration database through the
Operator Interface and includes descriptions
of card and port parameters.
Chapter 5 SSC, HTC, and SCLP
Ports
Describes operation and usage of SSC
(Secondary Signaling Channel), HTC (HDLC
TBus Channel), and SCLP (Signaling Channel
Link Protocol) ports, used to communicate
network management information, control
signals and system updates between
domains.
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Chapter 6 Promina 800 System Describes the hardware configurations and
specification for the rack- and
cabinet-mounted Promina 800 systems.
Chapter 7 Promina System
Components
Describes Promina 800 Hardware
components.
Chapter 8 Operator Interface
Commands
Contains the Operator Interface commands
used for the configuration of modules.
Appendix A Card Installation Installation and replacement procedures for
CE cards in the Promina 800 systems.
Appendix B PanaVue Configuration
for HTC Port Use
Describes how to configure a PanaView
workstation for IP connectivity to a promina
network.
Section Title Description
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 xv
Document Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
Convention Example Description
Key name Press DELETE. Refers to non-printing keys on the
keyboard that you press.
Simultaneous
Key
Press Shift+F1. Refers to non-printing keys on the
keyboard that need to be pressed
simultaneously.
bold Caution: Used for emphasis.
bold courier Type exit Indicates a command to be typed.
Enter Enter add ndp 2 Indicates that after typing the information,
press the Return or Enter key.
Italic Use breakers rated for
fast trip on supply
circuits.
Refers to a new term that is defined in the
text or glossary.
For more information,
see the Hardware
Description manual.
Refers to a document or book title.
Screen shot YYYY/MM/DD Refers to date used in screen shot.
Module module The term module refers to card systems,
except where the word card is used as
part of the name for the module.
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The following icons are used in this document to provide important
information:
Icon Description Definition
Note Directs the readers attention to important
information.
Caution Provides information on how to avoid possible
loss of packet traffic or damage to files or
equipment. Also, provides information on how to
avoid a potentially hazardous non-electrical
situation.
Caution Provides information about how to protect
against fire hazards.
Warning Provides information on how to avoid a
potentially hazardous electrical situation that, if
not avoided, could result in serious injury or
death.
Warning Provides information on how to avoid potentially
hazardous laser or LED radiation emission that,
if not avoided, can damage your eyes.
Safety Ground
Symbol
This symbol represents the Safety Ground
Connection connection on the Promina 800
Series chassis. This symbol has a circle around
the outside of the icon.
ESD Ground
Symbol
This symbol represents the ESD Ground
Connection on the Promina 800 Series chassis.
This symbol does not have a circle around the
outside of the icon.
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 xvii
Associated Documents
The following manuals in the Promina 800 Series documentation set
provide additional information.
Readers Response
We encourage comments on the content of this document. Please address
any comments to:
Manager, Technical Publications
net.com
6900 Paseo Padre Parkway
Fremont, California 94555
tech_pubs@net.com
net.com may use or distribute, without incurring any obligation, and in
any way it believes appropriate, any information supplied.
Promina 800 Series Manuals
Safety
Compliance and Safety
System Hardware
Promina 800
Installation and
Maintenance
Promina 200/400
Installation and
Maintenance
Promina 100 Installation
and Maintenance
Trunk Modules
Channelized Trunk
Modules
Trunk
Modules
ATM
Modules
Feature Modules
Port
Extender
Data
Modules
Packet
Modules
Analog Voice
Modules
Digital Voice
Modules
Quad Basic Rate
Interface
Management
Node
Management
Reference
Terminology
Reference
Quick
Reference
Alarms
and Events
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Technical Assistance Information
If there is a problem installing or using net.com products, call net.com
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) at the following numbers:
For North America, call 1.800.800.4638
For International collect calls, use 1.703.724.7999
TAC engineers are available by telephone 24 hours a day, seven days a
week. Warranty and contract customers receive first consideration in the
scheduling of technical resources.
Before contacting TAC for help, review and verify the provisions
contained in your warranty or contract. Depending on those provisions,
there might be a charge for service.
When authorized, TAC engineers can diagnose most network problems
remotely, using dial-up connections. When a service technician is
required, TAC will dispatch the nearest net.com or third-party service
engineer.
Note: Technical problems can be diagnosed and resolved more quickly if you
have remote access, such as a dial-in modem. Use a modem rated at 9600bps
or greater, or an ISDN connection, for dial-in net.com TAC support and
incoming PPP connections. For other remote access methods, contact net.com
TAC.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 1
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 1 - 1
1Pr omi na Syst ems
Over vi ew
A Promina system is a Multiservice Access Platform, the engine of a
multiservice backbone network. On a single platform, a Promina system
fully integrates the functions of a voice and data networking multiplexer,
an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) switch, a frame-relay
switch, a multiprotocol router, and a network management system. The
operating system software features a high degree of networking
intelligence which is distributed among all Promina nodes. In addition to
providing all these functions, Promina systems offer the flexibility of
using all existing customer Integrated Digital Network Exchange (IDNX)
feature cards.
This chapter provides an overview to the net.com Promina hardware
system in the following sections:
The Promina Network on page 1-2.
Hardware Features on page 1-5.
Call Configuration on page 1-5.
Network Management on page 1-6.
Promina Systems Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The Promina Network
Promina nodes are high performance systems that support internodal
trunks operating over subrated and nonsubrated T1, T3, E1, E3 and OC-3
transmission facilities. A Promina node provides the power and features
required for low speed (16 kbps) to high speed (T3/E3/OC-3) networking
over transmission facilities that range in speeds up to 155 Mbps. The
Promina node supports these feature modules:
trunk
voice, including voice compression server modules
circuit-, frame-, and packet-based exchange
data
For details on the Promina feature modules, refer to the specific module
manual; for example, Trunk Modules, Voice Modules, and Data Modules.
Also refer to the Packet Module Manual (for FRX, LWX or
PrimeSwitch).
Promina Systems Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 1 - 3
Private Networks Figure 1-1 shows an example of an net.com private network, consisting
of several nodes and topologies. In a network, the Promina 800, 400, 200,
and 100 are referred to as nodes. The logical connections between nodes
are called links. Trunks are the digital transmission facilities over which
voice, data, and video are transmitted.
Figure 1-1 Example of an net.com Private Network
Promina 400
Promina 400
Promina 800
Paris
London
New York
Promina 800
Berlin
Promina 400
Tokyo
Singapore
Sydney
Promina 800
Promina 200
Rio de
Janiero
Mexico
City
Promina 400
Hong
Kong
Promina 400
Promina 200

Promina Systems Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Interface and
Device
Compatibility
A Promina node is compatible with many public network services. It also
supports a wide range of applications by providing transparency to
protocols for specific applications and permitting connections to most
major types of voice, data, and image equipment (Figure 1-2).
Figure 1-2 Equipment Supported by Promina Systems
Promina 800
Promina 800
Promina 800
Promina 400
T1
T3
T3 T3
T1
T1
T1
Graphics
Workstation
Host
Host
Video
Tape
Drive
PBX
Promina 800
Ethernet
Token Ring
Token Ring
Ethernet
Promina Systems Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 1 - 5
Hardware Features
The Promina processor subsystems provide features and interfaces such
as:
mass storage provided by the PSM (Promina Server Module)
non-volatile storage for boot code, run-time code, and the
configuration database
real time clock
Ethernet ports
internal Ethernet port for intranodal communications
external Ethernet port for Network Management System (NMS)
connectivity
serial ports
Physical
Interfaces
Promina nodes uses industry standard physical interfaces to connect with
customer devices. The Promina nodes provide connections for:
data terminal equipment
voice equipment compatible to industry standards
video transmittal and receiving equipment.
For Promina system configurations, features, and options, contact your
local net.com sales representative.
Call Configuration
Once the Promina system is installed and tested, the Promina node is
configured.
The number of voice and data calls that can be supported by the Promina
node depends on the following:
the number of redundant modules
the number of available logical and physical slots on the node
the maximum number of database ports
Promina Systems Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Network Management
Using the processor modules, the Promina operator can access the
Operator Interface software to configure the node, monitor the network,
and diagnose network problems from any ASCII asynchronous terminal.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 2
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 2 - 1
2St andar d Equi pment
Modul es
This chapter contains an overview of the standard equipment modules for
Promina 800 Series nodes. It includes the following topics:
Overview on page 2-2.
Promina Controller Modules Overview on page 2-3.
Promina 800 Standard Equipment Configuration on page 2-4.
Promina Standard Equipment Connectivity on page 2-6.
Promina 800 Node Standard Equipment Redundancy on page 2-7.
Domain and System Redundancy on page 2-7.
Nonredundant Configurations on page 2-8.
Timing Sources on page 2-10.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Overview
The standard set of equipment modules that are part of every Promina
800 model include node processor modules, modules that provide
connection between node shelves, and cards that terminate system buses.
Other standard operating equipment include power supplies, chassis, and
cabinets. You can find procedures for installation of standard equipment
modules in Appendix A, Card Installation.
The types of standard equipment modules vary depending on the type of
node. All standard equipment modules consists of front cards, interface
cards, or both. Table 2-1 lists the cards for standard equipment modules
for each type of node and briefly describes each module.

Table 2-1 Promina 800 Standard Equipment Modules
Node Front Card Interface Card Description
Promina 800
only
Promina
Processor
Module (PPM)
PPM Interface
(PPMI)
PPM resides in the high-speed shelf
(HSS) and controls the node.
PPMI provides an Ethernet port, an
RS-232/RJ-45 port, and an Alarm
port.
Switching
Exchange
(SX-2)
SX Interface
(SXI-2)
SX-2 provides the switch matrix and
clocking on the node, as well as
communication between shelves.
N/A Shelf Bus
Interface (SBI-2)
SBI-2 connects the SX-2 modules to the
HSS.
Bus Extender
(BX)
BX Interface
(BXI)
BX provides the communication link
between the expansion shelf (EXS) or
standard shelf (STS) and the SX-2 on the
HSS-2.
N/A Bus Terminator Terminates system buses (STS only).
Promina 800
(required)
Promina 400
(optional)
Promina
Server Module
(PSM)
PSM Interface
(PSMI)
PSM serves as the node file system
manager and the focal point for local
network management and remote
access administrative and service
communications.
PSMI provides two Ethernet ports and
two RS-232/RJ-45 ports to support
these PSM functions.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 2 - 3
Promina
Controller
Modules Overview
The Promina node processor modules (PPM) and Promina node storage
module (PSM) control the internal logic and communication for the node
and provide the central processing and memory storage for the node. The
controller modules also provide the connections for access to the operator
interface.
The PPMs are high-performance controller cards using the Motorola
68LC060. The PLMs are multifunction controller cards using the
Motorola 68LC040.
The PSM has a 68LC040 microprocessor; it incorporates a hard disk
drive for storage of system code, configuration database, event logs, and
feature module code for Frame Relay Exchange (FRX), LAN-WAN
Exchange (LWX), and ISDN Exchange (ISDNX, also known as
PrimeSwitch Module). The combination of these high-speed
microprocessors and the onboard memory design on the Promina
controller cards enables fast system boot up and a high level of call
performance.
The Promina controller cards use a real time operating system. The
Promina operating system also includes these advanced features:
DOS-compatible filing system for easy access to files
Internet Protocol (IP) routing system for accessing files over Promina
and IDNX networks
Local and remote Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
agent for network management systems
Internet applications:
Network File System (NFS) client and server system
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Remote login (RLogin)
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) access to nodes via modem
For more information on each of the Promina controller modules refer to
Chapter 3, Card Descriptions. You can find the procedures for standard
equipment module installation in Appendix A, Card Installation.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina 800 Standard Equipment Configuration
A Promina 800 node must have one high-speed shelf (HSS) and one
standard shelf (STS) or expansion shelf (EXS) with any combination of
additional STS or EXS shelves, up to a maximum of seven shelves. For
more information on these shelves, refer to the Promina System
Components on page 7-1. Also see Appendix A, Card Installation.
A Promina 800 node may consist of either a nonredundant or redundant
configuration of PPM, PSM, SX-2, and BX cards and power supplies.
Refer to Promina 800 Node Standard Equipment Redundancy on page
2-7 for further detail.
A Promina 800 node with three EXS shelves and with redundant PPMs,
SX-2, and BX cards is illustrated in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Promina 800 standard Equipment Configuration

Air Space
HSS-0
PPM Cards
SX-2 Cards
SX-2 Cards
Trunk Card
PSM Card
EXS 2
EXS 3
Alarm Panel (optional) / Fan
Power Supplies
Power Supplies
T1-Jackfield (optional)/Fans
Voice Card
Power Supply Tray
EXS 1
T3-Jackfield (optional)
Air Space
BX Cards
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 2 - 5
Standard and Expansion Shelves
The Bus Extender (BX) cards and PSM modules must be installed in an
STS or an EXS. The BX card must reside in the leftmost slots in an STS
(for example, slots 16 and 17) or the rightmost slot in an EXS (for
example, slots 30 and 31).
The PSM can be installed in any slot in an STS or EXS except slots
reserved for BX cards.
High-Speed Shelf (HSS)
The PPM module and Switched Exchange (SX-2) cards must be installed
in an HSS-2 (shelf 0). These cards cannot function in any other type of
shelf.
The SX-2 cards must be installed in the leftmost slots (slots 0 and 1) and
the redundant SX-2 cards must be installed in the rightmost slots (slots 14
and 15). PPM cards can be installed in any HSS slot not reserved for
SX-2 cards.
SX-2 Port-to-Shelf Configuration
Each SX-2 card has four spigots numbered 0 to 3 starting with the bottom
connector. Each spigot provides 16 logical slots: 32 Mbps of bandwidth
per spigot for a total of 128 Mbps per SX-2 card, and a maximum of 256
Mbps with two SX-2 cards.
The SX-2 connects to each shelf through the BX cards (referred to as
BXA and BXB on redundant systems).
The STS shelf contains 12 slots. To maintain module 16 consistency,
STS slots are numbered as if there are 16 on each shelf (the four missing
slot numbers are discarded and appear as empty when the database is
queried). For example, if shelf 1 slots are numbered 16 to 27, shelf 2 slot
numbers start at 32.
Note: It is important to connect the SX-2 spigots so that the slot numbers are
consecutive; that is, so there are no gaps. For example, in a three-shelf
configuration, shelf 0 connects to spigot 0, shelf 1 to spigot 1, shelf 2 to spigot 2,
etc. The T3 modules can connect to spigots 6 and 7 regardless of gaps because
of clock reference considerations on spigots 0 through 3.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina Standard Equipment Connectivity
The Promina node processor modules provide connectivity between the
node processors (by way of internal Ethernet), to NMS or LAN systems
(by way of external Ethernet), to terminal/workstations, and to a remote
access modem. Figure 2-2 illustrates conceptually the standard
equipment connectivity in a Promina 800 with redundant PPMs and a
nonredundant PSM.
Note: PPMs and PSMs in a Promina 800 must be connected by the internal
Ethernet cable even in a nonredundant configuration. The Ethernet connection
enables code loading from the PSM to the PPM. Each end of the Ethernet
connection (including on any T-connector) must have a terminator installed.
Figure 2-2 Promina 800 standard Equipment Connectivity

Auxiliary Port to
Internal Ethernet
Nodal Modem
Console Ports
External Ethernet
External Ethernet
PPM
Front Card
Interface Card
PSM
PPM
PPM
to Terminals
or Workstation
Console Port
to Terminals
or Workstation
Alarm
Interface
Front Card
Interface Card
NMS /LAN
Terminator
Terminator
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 2 - 7
Promina 800 Node Standard Equipment Redundancy
A Promina 800 node may have redundant PPM and PSM modules.
Redundant PPMs are configured in a multiprocessing system with one
master PPM and the others serving as coprocessors. PSM modules
provide 1:1 redundancy.
A redundant Promina 800 may have two or four SX-2 cards (two
redundant pairs) to support up to eight system components consisting of
shelves or modules that support direct SX-2 connections such as the T3
module.
Note: Each T3/E3 card takes up one SX-2 spigot. Each CX card optionally
takes up one spigot. Each SCLX card takes from 1-2 spigots.
The redundant SX-2 and BX cards provide 1:1 redundancy.
Domain and
System
Redundancy
Promina 800 nodes with redundant standard equipment can be configured
to provide system redundancy through two domains. The required
equipment for each domain in a Promina 800 node is shown in Table 2-2.
Note: HSS-2 and PPMs are standard to both domains and are domain
independent. There can be up to four PPMs per node for load-sharing and not
necessarily for redundancy.
All the shelves (EXS/STS), T3/E3 trunk modules, and CX modules (with
T3/E3 interface cards) are connected to both Domain A and Domain B
through spigots on SX-2 cards. The SX-2 spigot on the HSS-2 shelf,
which is shelf 0 (zero), is connected to Shelf Bus Interface (SBI) ports A
Table 2-2 Domain Equipment in Promina 800
Number Equipment per Domain
1-2 HSS-2 shelf (per node; domain independent)
1 Shelf bus interface card
1-2 SX-2 modules
1-n T3 (1-4) and E3 (1-6) modules (domain dependent when
redundant; domain independent when nonredundant)
1-n CX (1-4) modules with T3/E3/OC3 interface cards
1-4 SCLX modules with OC3 interface cards
1-n BX modules (one per STS or EXS shelf)
1-4 PPMs (per node; domain independent)
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
and B, respectively; thus the node system has redundant standard
equipment via domains, and with one online and the other offline.
If the system is currently on domain A and a failure is detected on a
standard equipment card (for example, an SX-2, BX, T3, or SCLX, if
cabled and configured redundantly) the system will switch to Domain B.
The node has the highest priority, followed by the shelf, followed by the
trunk module. For example, if a Promina 800 is currently using domain A
and a failure occurs on a Domain A BX module, the Promina will switch
to Domain B, even though the redundant T3 card on Domain B is down.
This causes the T3 span to go down but enables the shelf that had the
failed BX to be restored. In this example, the system will still be
nonredundant.
The operator switches the domain online by entering the Switch Domain
command in the OI.
Nonredundant
Configurations
A Promina 800 node may also be configured as a nonredundant system. A
nonredundant configuration of the Promina 800 node consists of the
following:
One rack
One HSS-2
One to 3 EXS
One power supply per shelf
One PSM
One PPM
One SX-2
One T3, E3, or CX (with T3/E3 interface) (optional)
A second PPM is used in a nonredundant Promina 800 node, if needed, to
accommodate the number of load units in the node configuration. In this
situation, the second PPM does not provide redundancy.
A second SX-2 may be needed in a nonredundant Promina 800 node
depending on the number of shelves and whether the node has a
high-bandwidth trunk such as a T3, E3, or CX with T3/E3 interface.
Nonredundant Promina 800 configurations also have some restrictions in
supported components and system capabilities.
Only EXS shelves (to a maximum of three EXS shelves) are
supported.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 2 - 9
Only one high-bandwidth trunk card such as a T3, E3, or CX (with
T3/E3 interface) is supported.
A nonredundant configuration cannot support domain redundancy;
the B domain must be disabled in the configuration database to
suppress nonredundant events and alarms.
Standard Equipment Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Timing Sources
A single, central clocking source is vital to the operation of all digital
networks because it synchronizes transmission between communicating
devices. If the clocking of each element in the network is not
synchronized to a standard source, bit errors and frame slips can occur.
Internal clocking is provided as follows:
The SX-2 module can provide internal timing by way of the timing
signals generated by the onboard crystal oscillator. These cards can also
provide external timing by phase-locking onto external clock sources (for
example, digital transmission facilities, channel banks, or station clocks).
External clocking from customer equipment can also be provided to the
node through various modules including:
Trunk cards
Primary Rate Card (PRC) and Two Megabyte Channelized Port
(TMCP) voice cards
Universal Synchronous Data (USD) data cards
Note: USD data cards are not supported by the Promina 100.
For more information on setting up clocking, refer to the Node
Management manual.
Table 2-3 Clocking Sources
Node Card
Promina 800 SX-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 3
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 1
3Car d Descr i pt i ons
This chapter describes the front and interface cards for each of the
standard equipment modules, including information on the front panel
components and rear panel connectors. Information is organized by node
type for the Promina 800, 400, 200, and 100. You can find the following
information in this chapter:
Promina 800 standard Equipment Modules on page 3-2.
Dial-in Access Modem on page 3-19.
A condensed description is provided in Module Installation Requirements
on page A-2.
Caution: For clarity, illustrations that show connections, components, and
settings for interface cards do not show EMI shielding. Under no circumstances
should EMI shielding be removed from interface cards.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina 800 standard Equipment Modules
This section describes the following standard equipment modules:
Promina Processor Module (PPM)
Promina Server Module (PSM)
Switching Exchange Module (SX-2)
Bus Extender (BX)
This section also describes the bus terminator interface card and the Shelf
Bus Interface (SBI-2).
PPM Module The Promina Processor Module (PPM) consists of a PPM front card and
an interface card (PPMI). The PPM module has the following hardware
and software features:
A Motorola 68LC060 microprocessor operating at 50 MHz
16 MB of DRAM, expandable to 32 MB
4 MB flash, expandable to 16 MB
Boot code residing in flash memory to provide enough memory
space for two complete copies of the Promina software to be
stored
Support for downloadable field upgrades of boot code
A console port providing an RS-232 compliant (RJ-45) DTE serial
connection for an OI terminal; this port can be configured for
standard baud rates up to 38.4 kbps or autobaud sensing
An internal Ethernet port providing for intranodal communication
with other PPMs and PSMs
Load sharing multiprocessing
The PPM module contains sufficient flash and DRAM memory to load all
system software, including the configuration database. Upon power-up,
the system software is uploaded from the PSM to the PPM. The
configuration database is stored in DRAM. The backup boot storage
allows for processor recovery following a failed boot download or power
failure.
Note: If the PPM modules are configured with 32MB DRAM, consider raising
the low-ram threshold. You can modify this value with the modify node
command described in the Modifying Node Parameters on page 8-2 of the Node
Management manual. The command parameter description can be found in [16]
Low RAM Event Threshold on page 15-93 of that manual.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 3
Master and Coprocessor Functions
All Promina nodes have an SNMP agent and the Operator Interface (OI)
to enable node management. PPMs have the infrastructure to support
internodal network management services (NMS) communication
requirements, which allows the entire network to be managed from a
single NMS connection.
The PPM can be installed in any slot on the HSS-2 not reserved for an
SX-2 card. One to four PPMs can be installed in a Promina 800 node. One
PPM functions as the master when the system is powered up. If the
master PPM fails or if the operator assigns another PPM to be the master
while online, another PPM then becomes the master.
The distributed nature of the Promina software allows tasks to run on any
of up to four PPMs. Tasks can communicate with each other regardless of
their location. Two classes of PPMs exist: one is designated the master;
the others are coprocessors. When a master PPM restarts, the entire node
restarts. When a coprocessor PPM restarts, only the tasks on that
particular PPM restart.
Certain tasks, such as the TBus Manager and the Call Controller, run only
on the master PPM. The master PPM communicates with other node
slaves via the PBus/CBus system and with other nodes via the TBus.
SCLP (Signal Channel Link Protocol) and SSC (Secondary Signaling
Channel) are the mode of communication used to provide the
communication system with other nodes in the network. Refer to Chapter
5, SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports, for more information on SCLP and SSC
usage.
PPM Front Panel
Figure 3-1 describes the LED status indicators and components on the
PPM front panel.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 3-1 PPM Front Panel
GND
-5V
PPM
+5V
+12V
3
4
FAULT
6
5
7
TX
RX
CLSN
ONLINE
A
S
S
Y
0
2
4
4
8
3
ETHER
2
1
0
BRD
RST
CPU
RST
REV
A
ETHERNET LEDs
ONLINE (Green) When flashing, indicates that the Ethernet
transceiver is online.
COLLISION (Yellow) When flashing, indicates an Ethernet port
collision is occurring.
TRANSMIT (Green) When flashing, indicates the Ethernet signal
is transmitting data packets.
RECEIVE (Green) When flashing, indicates the Ethernet signal
is receiving data packets.
BOARD RESET POSTS
Shorting these connectors causes a complete hardware reset of all
PPM circuits.
ALARM LEDs
7 (Red) Flashes at software startup; when lit, indicates a
Critical alarm.
6 (Yellow) Indicates a Major alarm.
5 (Yellow) Indicates a Minor alarm.
4 (Yellow) Indicates an Informational alarm.
3 (Yellow) Not currently used.
PROCESSOR LEDs (Yellow)
When 2 is lit and 1 and 0 are alternately flashing, this PPM is the
master; if only 0 is flashing, this PPM is a coprocessor.
CPU RESET SWITCH
Pressing this switch initiates a soft (warm) reset.
FAULT LED (Red)
Lit during power-up (until PPM passes diagnostic tests); if it remains
lit, indicates that card has failed the start-up test.
TEST POINTS (Red)
Used to check power supply voltages to the card.
GROUND TEST POINT (Black)
Provides a ground for voltage measurements.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 5
PPMI Card The PPM Interface (PPMI) is an interface card that attaches to the PPM
front card and resides on the Promina 800s HSS-2. The PPMI includes
the pulse transformers, voltage converter, transceiver, and associated
components to support the media interface for 10Base2 Ethernet.
The PPMI is made up of three primary connectors (see Figure 3-2):
Thin coax (10Base2) Ethernet BNC connector for intranodal
communications with other PPM and PSM modules (commonly
referred to as Internal Ethernet interface)
DTE (YOST) connector for console port connectivity
net.com proprietary DB-26 26-pin alarm interface connector that
connects to an optional alarm panel
Figure 3-2 PPMI Connectors
J1, 48-Pin Connector
26-pin Alarm Panel
Interface Connector
Console DTE Port
(YOST)
REV
PPMI
ASSY
Internal Ethernet
(10Base2)
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SX-2 Module The SX-2 provides the clocking and switching functions for the HSS-2,
EXS and STS in a Promina 800. It also provides additional bandwidth to
the T3/E3 trunk card to supplement TBus bandwidth limitations.
Each SX-2 card provides up to 128 Mbps of switching bandwidth (256
Mbps for two SX-2s). Four shelves provide 128 Mbps, and eight shelves
provide 256 Mbps capacity. Both TBus and PBus information pass
through the SX-2.
In addition, the SX-2 module can provide the internal timing source to a
network via timing signals generated by its onboard oscillator, or it
phase-locks onto the incoming signal of an external clock source and
distributes it to the other nodes in the network. The SX-2 module can
accept up to eight clock references. The LEDs REF0 through REF7 (as
shown on the SX-2 card front panel) indicate when a clock reference is
present.
The Promina 800 contains two pairs of SX-2s per node for redundancy.
These cards can support additional shelves and T3/E3 trunk cards. If the
primary SX-2 set fails, the node switches domains and the backup SX-2
set automatically provides clocking and switching.
SX-2 Front Panel
Figure 3-3 describes the LED status indicators and components on the
SX-2 front panel.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 7
Figure 3-3 SX-2 Front Panel
A
S
S
Y
SX-2
REF7
REF6
REF5
REF4
REF3
REF2
REF1
REF0
ON LINE
MSTR
SYNC
LOSS
RST
FLT
4KHz
MSYNC
5.12 MHz
+12V
+5V
-5V
-12V
GND
REV
D
GROUND TEST POINT (Black)
Provides a ground for voltage measurements.
MASTER LED (Green)
Lit when the internal oscillator is selected (that is, the node is not
locked to an external clock source). When flashing quickly, the card
is in holdover mode.
BOARD RESET POSTS
Shorting these connectors causes a complete hardware reset of the
SX-2 card.
ON LINE LED (Green)
When lit, this LED indicates that this card is the active card providing
clocking and switching to the node.
CLOCK SIGNAL TEST POINTS
Front panel test points for clock signals generated by the SX-2.
CLOCK REFERENCE LEDs (Green)
References 0-7
When flashing, indicates the reference clock source that is being used
(currently selected). When lit, indicates that the clock reference is
present but is not currently in use. During boot, these LEDs indicate
that self tests are in progress.
HOT INSERTION PLUG
Connector for umbilical cord plug.
TEST POINTS (Red)
Used to check power supply voltages.
SYNC LOSS LED (Red)
When on, this LED indicates an alarm condition because of loss of
the reference signal or because of clock malfunction. Master LED
should also be on. PLL (phase lock loop) of the online card locks to
the internal OSC. The offline card still tracks the online card.
FAULT LED (Red)
Lit during power-up; if lit after power-up is complete, the card has
failed. When flashing, indicates the self-test diagnostics have indicated
an error.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SXI-2 Card The SXI-2 interface card provides four spigots (15-pin D-subconnectors)
used to connect to the SBI-2 (shelf bus interface) on the high-speed shelf,
the BXI card on the standard and expansion shelves, and the T3I/E3I
cards on the high-speed shelf.
SX-2 cards must use SXI-2 interface cards. (The SXI and SXI-2 are not
interchangeable. SX-2 and SXI-2 cards are required for Promina 800
nodes.)
The spigots are labeled 0, 1, 2, and 3 starting from the bottom. The spigot
number of the SXI-2 connected to the shelf determines the shelf number.
For example:
Spigot 0 connects to high-speed shelf 0
Spigot 1 connects to shelf 1
Spigot 2 connects to shelf 2
Spigot 3 connects to shelf 3
To support more than four shelves, a second SX-2 is required. In this
case, spigot 0 (on the second card) connects to shelf 4, spigot 1 connects
to shelf 5, and so on.
The backplane jumper on the EXS and STS must also be set.
SXI-2 Connectors
Figure 3-4 illustrates the connectors for the SX-2 Card Interface.
Note: There are no active components on the SXI-2.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 9
Figure 3-4 SXI-2 Connectors
60-Pin
15-Pin Connector
Rev
SXI-2
ASSY
-0-
-1-
-2-
-3-
Port 0 (shelves 0 and 4)
15-Pin Connector
Port 1 (shelves 1 and 5)
15-Pin Connector
Port 2 (shelves 2 and 6)
15-Pin Connector
Port 3 (shelves 3 and 7)
Connector
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SBI Card The SBI-2 card provides the interface between the SX-2 and a high-speed
shelf. SBI-A connects to SXA1 on Spigot 0, and SBI-B connects to SXB1
on Spigot 0.
Figure 3-5 SBI Cards, Domains A and B
BX Front Panel The BX module functions as the communication path between the SX-2
card (on the HSS-2) and the STS or EXS. BX cards must be installed in
an STS or an EXS. Figure 3-6 describes the front panel components on
the BX card.
Domain A (SBI B)
SBI Cards
15 Pin SX-2
Interface
Test Points
FTP1 +12 VDC (Blue)
FTP2 -2 VDC (Yellow)
FTP3 +5 VDC (Red)
FTP4 -5 VDC (Green)
FTP5 GND (Black)
P/S 1 BOT
P/S 2 TOP
Domain B (SBI A)
I/O
I/O
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 11
Figure 3-6 BX Front Panel
BX
A
S
S
Y
-5.2V
GND
REV
FAULT
CBUS
ONLINE
J
+5V
RST
FAULT LED (Red)
When on, this LED indicates that a failure has been detected on
the card.
RESET SWITCH
Toggle Switch. Resets the card. Also used when inserting and
removing the card.
HOT INSERTION PLUG
Connector for umbilical cord plug. Supplies operating voltages for
installing cards that are not hot insertable (T3).
ONLINE LED (Green)
When on, this LED indicates that this card is the active card and
is transmitting clock and TBus data to the shelf.
CBUS LED (Yellow)
When flashing or dim, indicates that the module is accessing the
CBus. When lit, indicates that the module is dominating the CBus
and that there is a malfunction.
TEST POINTS (Red)
Used to check the power supply voltages of the card.
GROUND TEST POINT (Black)
Provides ground for voltage measurements.
NORM
CARD
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
BXI Connectors The BXI card, shown in Figure 3-7, connects to the SX-2 card through a
single spigot (15-pin D connector).
Note: There are no active components on this interface card.
Figure 3-7 BXI Connectors
EMI Shield
in Front of Card
Backplane
Connector
15-Pin Connector
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 13
Promina Server
Module
The Promina Server Module (PSM) is an intelligent network file server
that is installed in a Promina 800 STS or EXS and is optional in the
Promina 400. It consists of a front card and a rear Promina Server Module
Interface (PSMI) card. The PSM does the following:
Acts as the central point for data storage
Interfaces with the hard drive, modem, internal Ethernet connection
to the PPM and PLM cards, and provides the external Ethernet
connection to an NMS workstation
Uses a DOS-compatible file system for storage of system code,
configuration database, event logs, and network management data
Supports two serial ports (DTE) for modem and terminal connectivity
with standard, programmable baud rates up to 38.4 kbps
Provides the physical connections and path for processor and server
module software upgrades
The PSM offers the following features:
A low-profile ATA hard drive mounted directly on the PSM card
4 MB of flash memory, expandable to 16 MB, that holds two copies
of the boot code
4 MB of DRAM, expandable to 64 MB
Real time clock/calendar for time-stamping disk files
The PSMs nodal file system provides mass storage for a nodal database,
several versions of Promina application code, and expanded event logs.
The runtime code is downloaded from the PSM to PPMs and PLMs via
the internal Ethernet.
The External Ethernet connects the PSM to a Network Management
System (NMS) workstation or a LAN and supports a maximum bit rate of
10 Mbps. The External Ethernet port autosenses between either 10Base2
port or 10BaseT port media. (Only one type of External Ethernet port
may be used at a time, not both.)
PSM Redundancy
There can be a maximum of two PSMs per node. At startup the PSM
software establishes which module is primary (online) and which is
secondary (offline). To provide service or be available for service to the
PPMs or PLMs in the node, a PSM must be either online or offline,
respectively. The online PSM is the currently active PSM; the offline is
the hot-standby PSM.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
For a PSM to be online or offline, it must have a configuration database
or a boot configuration (psmparms) file. Refer to Chapter 5, SSC, HTC,
and SCLP Ports, for more information on PSM configurations.
The primary (online) PSM keeps the disk database on the offline PSM up
to date via a Disk Mirroring task. Whenever the database is saved to the
PSM disk, the new database will be mirrored to the offline PSM. If there
is only a single online PSM and a redundant PSM is installed in the node,
then the database will be mirrored to that PSM directly.
In a redundant configuration a specialized Y cable is used to connect to a
nodal modem. In this redundant configuration, only the primary (online)
PSM can communicate with the DCE device while the other PSM is
placed in the offline mode.
PSM Front Panel
Figure 3-8 describes the status indicators and components on the PSM
front panel.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 15
Figure 3-8 PSM Front Panel
PSM
A
S
S
Y
0
2
4
4
9
1
+5V
GND
REV
5
4
3
2
1
0
ACT
FAULT
CPU
CLSN
TX
RX
RST
BRD
RST
T-ACT
ON
RX
CLSN
TX
ON
A
BOARD
DISK
HDD
ON
ETHER.
INT.
ETHER.
EXT.
VOLTAGE TEST POINTS (Red)
Used to check power supply voltages to the card.
CPU RESET SWITCH
Depressing the button forces a soft reset.
EXTERNAL ETHERNET LEDs
ONLINE (Green) Indicates the Ethernet transceiver is in active
mode.
COLLISION (Yellow) When flashing, indicates an Ethernet collision.
TRANSMIT (Green) When flashing, indicates Ethernet is
transmitting.
RECEIVE (Green) When flashing, indicates Ethernet is receiving.
HARD DISK LEDs (Green)
ON Lit when the hard disk is ready to use.
HDD Flashing while the processor accesses the hard disk; off while
the disk is idle.
MODULE STATUS LEDs (Yellow)
Signal various stages of the powerup and diagnostics process for the
PSM. At startup all are lit for two seconds, then are off for one second.
As powerup and diagnostics complete successfully, the LEDs light in
ascending order (0 to 5).
INTERNAL ETHERNET LEDs
Functions are identical to External Ethernet LEDs (see above), but for
the Internal Ethernet.
FAULT LED (Red)
Indicates a fault in the PSM. On failure of a test, this LED flashes for
3 seconds before the module reboots.
ACTIVE LED (Green)
Lit when the PSM is active; off when it is in standby mode.
BOARD RESET POSTS
Short these contact posts to perform a hard reset of the card.
GROUND TEST POINT (Black)
Provides a ground for voltage measurements.
TWISTED PAIR-ACTIVE LED (Yellow)
Lit when the PSM is in twisted pair mode and the link is active.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina Server
Module Interface
The Promina Server Module Interface (PSMI) is an interface card that
provides two Ethernet interfaces and two RS-232 compliant (YOST)
interfaces for the PSM front card. Figure 3-9 illustrates the connectors on
the PSMI.
Features of the PSMI are shown below:
Table 3-1 PSMI Features
Interface Type Description
External Ethernet I/F Single thin coax 10Base2 (BNC) and one
twisted pare (UTP) 10BaseT Ethernet
connector for NMS connectivity. (Only one
connector type, either 10Base2 or 10BaseT,
can be used at a time; simultaneous use is not
permitted.)
Internal Ethernet I/F One thin coax 10Base2 Ethernet connector for
intranodal communications with Promina
processor cards.
Auxiliary Port One auxiliary YOST connector for modem
(DTE) connectivity.
Console Port One console YOST connector for
terminal/console (DTE) connectivity.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 17
Figure 3-9 PSMI Connectors
J1, 96-Pin Connector
Auxiliary DTE Port
Internal Ethernet
(10Base2)
(YOST)
PSMI/F
ASSY
Console DTE Port
(YOST)
External Ethernet
External Ethernet
(10Base2)
(10Base-T)
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Bus Terminator Each standard shelf (STS) must have a bus terminator to serve as the
endpoint of the system buses. This card does not have a front card. Figure
3-10 illustrates a bus terminator card.
The card plugs into the left-most slot of the backplane when viewed from
the back of the unit. The battery charging circuitry is not used.
Figure 3-10 Bus Terminator Connectors
Battery Connector
96-Pin DIN
Backplane
Connectors
(not used)
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 3 - 19
Dial-in Access Modem
The Promina 800 Series provides remote dial-in capabilities into all
Promina nodes via a modem. The purpose of the dial-in access is to
enable Technical Support access to Promina networks and to allow for
remote upgrading of Promina system software and CPU Boot code.
Dial-in access is password protected and has an optional dial-back
verification procedure.
The modem has non-volatile configuration storage and remote
configuration and diagnostics capability.
For Promina 800 nodes, a modem is connected via an adapter DB-25
to RJ-45 cable to the auxiliary port on a PSMI.
For Promina 800 nodes with a redundant PSM, the modem is
connected to the auxiliary ports on each PSMI card via a Y cable.
Card Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 4
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 1
4Sof t war e Conf i gur at i on
This chapter contains information on how to use the Operator Interface
(OI) to install standard equipment modules, query card configurations,
and configure the speed on the processor ports. It also includes a
description of the parameters and configuration displays. The following
topics are discussed in this chapter:
Card Installation on page 4-2.
Standard Equipment Parameters on page 4-6.
Processor Card Parameters on page 4-6.
PSM Card Parameters on page 4-7.
Card Query Displays on page 4-10.
Processor Card Configurations on page 4-10.
Card Configuration Descriptions on page 4-12.
Query PSM Displays on page 4-18.
PSM Card Configuration Descriptions on page 4-19.
SX-2 Card Configuration on page 4-20.
BX Card Configuration on page 4-22.
Console Port Settings on page 4-24.
Refer to the Chapter 8, Operator Interface Commands for a listing of all
commands and information about using menus and expert mode.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Card Installation
After physically installing the standard equipment cards (see Appendix
A, Card Installation), use the Operator Interface to add the cards to the
configuration database and to initialize the cards in the node. The node
processor cards parameter data is flooded throughout the network during
the initialization process. Refer to the Node Management manual for
additional explanation and procedures.
Note: The PSM should be installed first, before IP Access Lists are created.
The procedure for installing a PSM differs from the general procedures
used for other standard equipment cards. The PSM is not installed
through the card ID (for example, C3) as with other node cards. It is
installed by using the ins psm command rather than the Install Card
command. The typical procedure for installing a PSM is shown in
Example 4-3.
The general card installation procedure is provided below. Examples for
the PPM (Example 4-1) and the PLM and IPLM (Example 4-2) are
shown following the procedure. All of these examples assume the
operator has already logged into the Operator Interface. Following the
examples are descriptions of the modifiable parameters.
Note: The IPLM installation (processor sector) is performed exactly the same
as the PLM.
Card Installation
After Node
Initialization
To install a card after node initialization has been performed:
1. Enter the Install Card (or Install PSM) command at the prompt.
2. Enter the card ID (slot number) of the card to be installed (not
applicable with PSM).
3. Enter the number that corresponds to the card to be installed or press
the Return key to accept the default card type. The default card type
is in square brackets (for example, [PPM]).
4. If the card does not have any parameters, skip this step. To change the
default parameters, enter the parameter index, specify the new
parameter value, and press Return. Entering a ? displays the valid
inputs for the parameter. When complete, press Return to confirm
that the parameters are correct.
5. When prompted to activate the card (the card is available for service),
press Return to activate the card or enter N. If the card is not
activated, the software displays an enable-card prompt (the card is
available for testing). Press Return to enable the card or enter N.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 3
Example 4-1 PPM Card Installation
INSTALL which CARD(s)? [ALL ON THIS NODE]
CARD ID = c3
*** Slot N5C3 contains card type PPM.
Do you want to install card N5C3? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** Installable Card Types ***
[ 0] TRK [20] HSD-2 [40] PX PLUS
[ 1] LDCELP12 [21] TMCP [41] E3-TRK
[ 2] LDCELP24 [22] T3-TRK [42] VCFAX-24
[ 3] CX [23] QXP [43] VCFAX-12
[ 4] QSD [24] TK64 [44] PX-3
[ 5] TRK-2 [25] I422-TRK [45] TRK-3
[ 6] HSD [26] QASD [46] ECHOX
[ 7] DS-1 [27] HDVC24 [47] APX
[ 8] USD [28] HDVC12 [48] SX-2
[ 9] MEM [29] QAVP [49] PLM
[10] QSD-2 [30] BX [50]* PPM
[11] TK56 [31] SX [51] LDCELP6
[12] PRC [32] HPC [52] HLC
[13] DS0A [33] DS0B [53] PVEC
[14] VC31 [34] PX [54] PVE24
[15] VC62 [35] PX-2 [55] HINTU
[16] DMD [36] PVAC [56] SCLX
[17] INTU-558 [37] PVA
[18] INTU-560 [38] LS-TRK
[19] X50 [39] SATRK
NOTE: '*' marks default selection.
Enter card type for card N5C3? [PPM]
CARD TYPE =
*** PPM Card N5C3 has been INSTALLED.
*** PPM card N5C3 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Alarm/Monitor Interface = YES
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PPM record updated
Do you want to ACTIVATE card N5C3? [YES]
(Enter '?' to display card configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** PPM N5C3 has been ENABLED
*** PPM N5C3 has been ACTIVATED
*** Command Complete ***
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Example 4-2 PLM and IPLM Card Installation
INSTALL which CARD(s)? [ALL ON THIS NODE]
CARD ID = c0
*** Slot N5C0 contains card type PLM.
Do you want to install card N5C0? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** Installable Card Types ***
[ 0] TRK [20] HSD-2 [40] PX PLUS
[ 1] LDCELP12 [21] TMCP [41] E3-TRK
[ 2] LDCELP24 [22] T3-TRK [42] VCFAX-24
[ 3] CX [23] QXP [43] VCFAX-12
[ 4] QSD [24] TK64 [44] PX-3
[ 5] TRK-2 [25] I422-TRK [45] TRK-3
[ 6] HSD [26] QASD [46] ECHOX
[ 7] DS-1 [27] HDVC24 [47] APX
[ 8] USD [28] HDVC12 [48] SX-2
[ 9] MEM [29] QAVP [49]* PLM
[10] QSD-2 [30] BX [50] PPM
[11] TK56 [31] SX [51] LDCELP6
[12] PRC [32] HPC [52] HLC
[13] DS0A [33] DS0B [53] PVEC
[14] VC31 [34] PX [54] PVE24
[15] VC62 [35] PX-2 [55] HINTU
[16] DMD [36] PVAC [56] SCLX
[17] INTU-558 [37] PVA
[18] INTU-560 [38] LS-TRK
[19] X50 [39] SATRK
NOTE: '*' marks default selection.
Enter card type for card N5C0? [PLM]
CARD TYPE =
*** PLM Card N5C0 has been INSTALLED.
*** PLM card N5C0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Alarm/Monitor Interface = YES
[ 5] Aux Port PPP access = DISABLED
[ 6] PPP Baud Rate = 38400
[ 7] PPP Local IP = 0.0.0.0
[ 8] PPP Remote IP = 0.0.0.0
[ 9] PPP Tyco Device = /tyCo/1
[10] MTU Size = 576
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PLM record updated
Do you want to ACTIVATE card N5C0? [YES]
(Enter '?' to display card configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** PLM N5C0 has been ENABLED
*** PLM N5C0 has been ACTIVATED
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 5
*** Command Complete ***
Example 4-3 PSM Card Installation
Enter command
< install psm
INSTALL PSM on which node? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
***PSM Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Console Baud Rate = 9600
[ 1] Auxiliary Baud Rate = 9600
[ 2] External IP = 172.20.42.182
[ 4] Subnet Mask = 0xffff0000
[ 5] PSM1 Assigned CardID = 24
[ 6] PSM2 Assigned CardID = 0
[10] Aux Port PPP access = DISABLED
[11] PPP Baud Rate = 38400
[12] PPP Local IP = 172.20.50.25
[13] PPP Remote IP = 172.20.50.50
[14] PPP TyCo Device = /TYCO/1
[15] MTU Size = 576
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PSM record updated
*** Command Complete ***
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Standard Equipment Parameters
Among the standard equipment cards, only the node processor modules
(PPM, PSM, PLM, and IPLM) have modifiable parameters. The type and
number of modifiable parameters vary among the card types. Refer to the
previous card installation examples to see which parameters apply to each
card. The installation examples also show the initial or default parameters
for each card.
Processor Card
Parameters
The PPM has only one modifiable parameter, Alarm/Monitor Interface,
which is also a parameter for the PLM and IPLM. Modifiable parameter
descriptions for the PPM, PLM, and IPLM follow.
[0] Alarm/Monitor Interface
Values are Yes (default) or No.
The alarm panel interface is a 26-pin connector (shown in Figure 3-2) on
the PPMI and PLMI cards that is cabled to the optional alarm panel. This
parameter is always set to Yes even if there is no alarm panel installed on
the node. If this parameter is set to No, the PPM and PLM will not
recognize alarms related to external power failures such as a PDU line.
Use the Modify External Alarm Threshold command to cause audible
and visual alarms to be generated on the alarm panel when an alarm
meeting the value specified by this command occurs on the node or in the
network. Audible and visual alarms are also generated when there is a
power supply failure. These alarms are logged in the alarm and event
logs.
[5] PPP on Aux Port
The values are Disabled (default) or Enabled.
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) parameters enable sending and
receiving IP packets remotely over the auxiliary port on the PLM and
IPLM by TAC via the node modem.
To modify PPP parameters for the PLM and IPLM, use the Install Card
or Modify Card commands. As with other parameters for the PLM and
IPLM, the PLM and IPLM must be disabled to install or modify
parameters. (If the PLM or IPLM is disabled, it will bring down any
existing PPP connection.) No card or node restart is required to configure
or modify the PPP parameters on the PLM and IPLM.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 7
[6] PPP Baud Rate
The values are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 14400, 19200, 28800,
38400 (default), 57600, and 115200.
This parameter is the baud rate associated with the PPP connection for the
host processor (PLM and IPLM) end. Both ends of the PPP connection
should be configured to have the same baud rate.
[7] PPP Local IP
The value is 0.0.0.0 (default) or the IP address associated with the local
(host node) side of the PPP connection.
[8] PPP Remote IP
The value is 0.0.0.0 (default) or the IP address of the remote side of the
PPP connection.
[9] PPP TyCo Device
The value is the type of serial device and port number; /tyCo/1 is the
default.
The default, /tyCo/1, is the only appropriate value for the auxiliary port
on a PLM and IPLM. The term, tyCo, is the standard representation for
serial terminal devices in the VXWorks operating system software. The
tyCo port number for the auxiliary port is 1.
[10] MTU Size
The values are 256 to 5000 (default is 576).
The value is the Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU) that is to be used for
this PPP connection (this value must match the value used by the remote
end).
PSM Card
Parameters
The modifiable parameters for the PSM and their descriptions follow.
[0/1] Console/Auxiliary Baud Rate
The values are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default for console port), 14400,
19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200, and Autobaud (default for
auxiliary port).
This parameter is the baud rate associated with the console or auxiliary
port on the PSM when used for a TTY connection. Both ends of the
connection should be configured to have the same baud rate.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
[2] External IP
The value is 0.0.0.0 (default) or the assigned IP address for the PSM.
The External IP settings are Class A, B, or C IP addresses to be set when
installing the PSM card. Typically a network administrator will assign an
appropriate IP address for the External Ethernet IP. For more information
about IP addresses refer to the Node Management manual.
[4] Subnet Mask
The value is 0xffff0000 (default) or the IP address (in binary) assigned to
the PSM to identify it to external network systems.
This parameter sets the subnet mask (network, subnet, and host IDs) for
the PSM. This mask has a 32-bit value containing binary 1 bits for
network ID and subnet ID, and binary 0 bits for host ID. The subnet mask
is the section of the IP address that determines the network destination as
used by routers. A router always reads the decimal numbers between the
dots (.) as octets (groupings of 8 bits). For more information about setting
the subnet mask refer to the Node Management manual.
Typically a network administrator will assign appropriate values.
Note: If a subnet mask value is entered that is out of the range of the IP network
identifier, it may not FTP to the targeted PSM.
[5/6] PSM1/2 Assigned CardID
The value is 0 (default) or the slot number for the respective PSM card.
This parameter sets the PSMs card identification. Since PSM cards are
not identified by the node as with other cards in Promina nodes, the
PSMs slot number is entered as the PSM card ID.
[10] PPP on Aux Port
The values are Disabled (default) or Enabled.
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) parameters enable the sending and
receiving of IP packets over the auxiliary port on the PSM and is intended
for remote access use by TAC via the node modem.
Use the Install PSM or Modify PSM commands at initial installation or
when modifying the PPP parameters on the auxiliary port on the PSM. No
card or node restart is required to configure or modify the External IP
address or the PPP parameters on the PSM.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 9
[11] PPP Baud Rate
The values are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 14400, 19200,
28800, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
This parameter is the baud rate associated with the PPP connection for the
host processor (PSM) end. Both ends of the PPP connection should be
configured to have the same baud rate.
[12] PPP Local IP
The value is 0.0.0.0 (default) or the IP address associated with the local
(host node) side of the PPP connection.
[13] PPP Remote IP
The value is 0.0.0.0 (default) or the IP address of the remote side of the
PPP connection.
[14] PPP TyCo Device
The value is the type of serial device and port number; /tyCo/1 is the
default.
The default, /tyCo/1, is the only appropriate value for the auxiliary port
on a PLM and IPLM. The term, tyCo, is the standard representation for
serial terminal devices in the VXWorks operating system software. The
tyCo port number for the auxiliary port is 1.
[15] MTU Size
The values are 256 to 5000 (default is 576).
The value is the Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU) that is to be used for
this PPP connection (this value must match the value used by the remote
end).
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Card Query Displays
After a card is installed, the operator can query the card through the
Operator Interface to display the cards current database configuration.
The following sections give examples of the configuration display for
each of the standard equipment controller modules. Descriptions of the
configuration fields are provided after the examples.
Note: As with other OI commands for the PSM, the PSM is not queried through
the card ID (for example, c3) as with other node cards; use the Query PSM
command instead.
The PSM has a separate interface menu, which enables the operator to
query PSM cards for specific PSM configuration information. An
explanation of using the PSM Promina Interface Menu (PPIM), a PPIM
configuration display, and descriptions of the configuration fields are
provided in the next section, Query PSM Displays on page 4-18. Refer to
the Operator Interface Command Summary Chapter for a listing of all
PSM commands and information about other procedures related to the
PSM.
Processor Card
Configurations
The following examples (Example 4-4 and Example 4-5) show typical
configuration displays when PPM and PSM cards are queried.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 11
Example 4-4 PPM Configuration Display
< q car, c4/d
*** PPM Card N200C2 Configuration (Cpu:C2) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: PPM (Rev A)
Serial Number: 1376894
Part Number: 024483-203
Idle Time: 100 Bytes of RAM Left: 5310216
RTC overruns: 0 CBUS Interrupts/Second: 0
Alarm Panel I/F: ENABLED Cpu Status: COPROCESSOR
DB Checksum: 895ACE Master Cpu: C3
Perm Boot Version: 44.12 Code Version: 2.47.7
Wrt Boot Version: 46.4
Load Units: 32 Current GMT: 22:48:16
Power Up: 118:35:02 ago Restart: 5:09:10 ago
CPU Restart Count: 1 Task Restart Count: 0
*** Console Port Configuration ***
Console Port 0: Speed=AUTOBAUD Type=GLASS TTY Mode=OPERATOR CONSOLE
*** Interface Information ***
Serial Number: 1475958 Revision: A
*** Task Distribution ***
PSC/SCLP : 5 6 29 146 147 148 149 150 154 152 153 137
CAS : 17 18 19
T3 TRUNK : 5 6
TRK3 TRUNK : 43
Number of Installed SSC Ports: 0
Internal IP Addr: 76.44.124.132
Packets RX: 321 Packets TX: 118
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
Collisions: 0
Gateway IP Addr: 75.44.124.129
Example 4-5 PSM Configuration Display (via Processor Operator Interface)
ENTER COMMAND [QUERY CARD]
< que psm
QUERY PSM on which node? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
*** N1 PSM Database Configuration ***
Console Port: 9600 bps Auxiliary Port: 9600 bps
External IP: 134.56.149.26 PSM Card Ids: None
Subnet Mask: 0xFFFF0000
*** PSM PPP Configuration: PPP is DISABLED ***
PPP Baud Rate: 9600 bps MTU Size: 576 bytes
Local IP: 0.0.0.0 Remote IP: 0.0.0.0
tyCo Device: /tyCo/1
*** PSM Configuration ***
MAC Address: 0.80.B2.10.8E.82 Status: ONLINE
Internal IP: 11.0.0.17 Code Version: 15.3.1 v45.5
HW Serial No: 1354290 HW Revision: B
*** Hit RETURN to continue (ESCAPE to quit) ***
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Card
Configuration
Descriptions
The following list describes the fields of the card configuration display.
The fields are described in alphabetical order.
Alarm Panel I/F
This field indicates whether the alarm panel parameter is set to Enabled
or Disabled. The node can have an optional alarm panel for visual and
audible alarms.
Auxiliary Port Configuration
All of the following port parameter fields apply to the PLM and IPLM,
but only the Speed parameter field applies to the PSM.
SpeedThis indicates the port speed for the Console port. Values
are: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600,
115200, and Autobaud (default).
TypeThis indicates the type of terminal (specified through the
software) that is attached to the port. Values are: GLASS TTY or TVI
925.
ModeThis indicates the activity on the port (specified through the
software). Values are: Operator Console, Auto Eventlog Network,
Auto Eventlog Local, Alarm Monitor Network, or Alarm Monitor
Local.
Note: When your configuration includes redundant PLMs, any modifications to
the auxiliary port configuration on one PLM must also be made to the auxiliary
port on the second PLM.
Bytes of RAM Left
This field indicates the amount of RAM in kbytes that is remaining.
CBUS Interrupts/Sec
This field indicates how many interrupts occurred per second.
Code Version
This field indicates the version of the code currently running on the
processor.
Console Port Configuration
The Speed parameter field applies to the PSM.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 13
SpeedThis indicates the port speed for the Console port. Values are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400,
57600, 115200, and Autobaud.
CPU Restart Count
This field indicates the number of times that the processor has been
restarted since the last power up.
CPU Status
This field indicates the current status of the card. Values are:
MasterThe card is the master processor. The master performs
certain main tasks and distributes the other tasks among the
coprocessors if necessary.
CoprocessorThe card is a coprocessor sharing the work load with
the master.
DisabledThe card is installed, but the configuration database is
disabled. When this value is Disabled, the value of the DB Status for
the card will also be Disabled, and the card will not build new tasks in
this state.
Not PresentThe card is not physically in the card slot. When this
value is Not Present, the value of the Slot Type for the card will be
None.
Current GMT
This field indicates the current Greenwich Mean Time (hh:mm:ss)
according to the processor. When the node is initialized, this field may
have a value of Unknown.
DB Checksum
This field indicates in hex the checksum of the resident database. All
processor cards in the node should have the same checksum (indicating
that they have the same configuration database). If the checksum is
different and does not match within 45 seconds, call net.coms Technical
Assistance Center (TAC) or your technical support organization.
DB Status
This indicates the cards current status in the configuration database.
Values are: Active (in service), Enabled (in test mode), Disabled, and Not
Installed.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
External IP
Refer to [2] External IP on page 4-8.
Gateway IP Addr
This field indicates the IP address of the gateway node in the applicable
domain. For more information about IP addresses and gateway nodes
refer to the Node Management manual.
HW Revision
This field indicates the manufacturing revision level of the PSM card.
HW Serial No
This field indicates the serial number on the PSM card.
Idle Time (%)
This field indicates the amount of time expressed as a percentage that the
processor is idle.
Internal IP (Address)
This field displays the internal Network IP address of the PSM when
configured or is blank when the address has not been configured. For
more information about IP addresses refer to the Node Management
manual.
Internal IP Addr
This field indicates the Internal IP address on the PPM, PLM, or IPLM
which is assigned automatically during node configuration. For more
information about IP addresses refer to the Node Management manual.
Load Units
This field indicates the number of processor load units currently in use on
the card.
Local IP
This field indicates the network IP address of the local (host node) side of
the PPP connection on the PSM, PLM, or IPLM card.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 15
MAC Addr
This field indicates the Media Access Control (MAC) address, which is a
six-byte hardware address (set when manufactured) that is unique to each
PSM.
Master CPU
This field indicates the card ID of the master node processor (PPM, PLM,
or IPLM). This field is displayed only when the value of Status is not
Master.
MTU Size
This field indicates the Maximum Transmission Unit size of an IP packet
over a PPP connection. The remote side of the PPP connection must also
be configured to this value.
Number of Installed SSC Ports
This field indicates the number of currently installed SSC ports on the
specific PPM, PLM, or IPLM.
Perm Boot Version
This field indicates the permanent boot code version that is installed in
the PPM, PLM, or IPLM flash memory at manufacture.
Power Up
This field indicates the amount of time (hh:mm:ss) since the processor
was last powered up. The card powers up whenever it is removed and
re-inserted into the card slot, or whenever power is interrupted.
PPP Baud Rate
This field is the baud rate associated with the PPP configuration on the
PSM.
PSM Card ID
Refer to [4] Subnet Mask on page 4-8.
Remote IP
This field indicates the network IP address of the remote side of the PPP
connection.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Restart
This field indicates the amount of time (hh:mm:ss) since the processor
was last restarted; for example, when the restart command is executed.
RTC Overruns
This field indicates the number of 8-millisecond time slots in which the
processor failed to complete all of its real time processing. A large, or
rapidly incrementing number of RTC Overruns is an indication that the
processor is overloaded.
Serial Number
This field indicates the serial number on the card.
Slot Type
This field indicates the type of card physically in the slot. Values can be
any card type or None (when there is no card in the slot). The boards
revision level is also displayed.
Status
This field indicates the functional states of the specific PSM(s). The states
can be:
OnlinePSM is currently servicing the node.
OfflinePSM is in hot-standby mode.
IdlePSM is not able to serve node.
A PSM is in the idle state if it does not have an initialized database or
boot configuration (psmparms) file.
Subnet Mask
Refer to [4] Subnet Mask on page 4-8.
Task Distribution
These fields indicate the trunk, voice, and packet tasks that require load
units. The following tasks may be displayed:
PSC/SCLPtask(s) associated with SCLP (Signaling Channel Link
Protocol) channels. A SCLP task instance typically corresponds to
slot number of the trunk card it controls. However, SCLP task IDs
associated with TRK-3 proprietary bundles do not match the TRK-3
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 17
card IDs. Instead, they are assigned arbitrary numbers between 129
and 250.
CASChannel Associated Signaling task(s) associated with the PRC
and TMCP cards.
PKT Interfacetask(s) associated with PX cards.
Gatewaytask(s) associated with one or more gateway trunks that
connect to the same adjacent gateway node.
T3 Trunktask(s) associated with T3 trunk cards.
TRK-3 Trunktask directly manages the TRK-3 card and brings
bundles up and down on the card.
Since there is only one VF (Voice Frequency) task per node, rather than
one per card, the task is not displayed.
Task Restart Count
This field indicates the number of times a task restart has occurred on the
processor since the last power up. This is a count of the task crashes.
TyCo Device
This field indicates the setting of the serial device value for the auxiliary
port on a PSM, PLM, or IPLM.
Wrt Boot Version
This field indicates the writable boot code version that is stored in the
flash memory of a PPM, PLM, or IPLM.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Query PSM Displays
The PSM has a separate interface menu. Level 1 through 4 Promina
operators can use the PSM Promina Interface Menu (PPIM) to query the
PSM(s) for operational status. An operator can access the PPIM from the
main Promina Interface Menu by selecting the Connect to the PSM menu
item in the Prologue Procedure Menu. Example 4-6 illustrates a typical
session of querying the PSMs on a node when one of the PSMs has not
been initialized (idle status). Descriptions of the configuration fields are
provided after the example.
Example 4-6 Query PSM Display
Node 249 Card 11 Console Port
1. Operator Interface
6. Connect to a CPU in this node
7. Connect to another node
8. Connect to a PSM (this node)
9. Connect to CX card (this node)
10. Connect to PX card (this node)
99. Logout
Enter Choice
->8
Node 249 Remote Port

2. PSM Operator Interface
6. Connect to a CPU in this node
7. Connect to another node
99. Logout
Enter Choice
-> 2
PSM OPERATOR INTERFACE MENU
* 1 QUERY ALL PSMS
9 RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU
SELECT OPTION

< 1
Fetching PSM data...
************* PSMs in this Node ************
MAC Addr: 8.0.3e.2.4.6
Status: OFFLINE
Database: I21 D0 N22
Int IP Addr: 21.0.1.98
Ext IP Addr: 33.3.3.66 (not connected)
PSM code: 14.1.2.41.39
MAC Addr: 8.0.3e.2.44.66 This PSM
Status: ONLINE
Database: I21 D0 N22
Int IP Addr: 21.0.1.97
Ext IP Addr: 33.3.3.66 (connected)
PSM code: 14.1.2.41.39
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 19
PSM Card
Configuration
Descriptions
The following list describes the fields of the PSM card configuration
display (via the PSM Promina Interface Menu). The fields are described
in alphabetical order.
Database
When the database is initialized, this field displays internal Network ID,
domain ID, and node ID. When the database is not initialized, this field
will be blank.
Ext IP Addr
Refer to [2] External IP on page 4-8 for a description of this field. The
parenthetical comments connected or not connected indicate whether the
PSM is connected to an external Ethernet or not.
Int IP Addr
This field displays the internal Network IP address of the PSM when
configured or is blank when the address has not been configured.
PSM Code
This field indicates the version of boot code the PSM is currently running.
MAC Addr
This field indicates the Media Access Control (MAC) address, which is a
6-byte hardware address (set when manufactured) unique to each PSM.
Status
This field indicates the functional states of the specific PSM(s). The states
can be:
OnlinePSM is currently servicing the node.
OfflinePSM is in hot-standby mode.
IdlePSM is not able to serve node.
A PSM is in the idle state if it does not have an initialized database or
boot configuration (psmparms) file.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SX-2 Card Configuration
Example 4-7 shows an example of the configuration for the SX-2 card. It
includes the slot number of the PPM card (in parentheses) that is
managing the functionality of the card.
Example 4-7 SX-2 Card Configuration Display
*** SX-2 Card N4C0 Configuration (CPU:C3) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: SX-2 (Rev D)
Serial Number: 832923 Firmware Rev: D00
Active Domain: A Status: ONLINE
Domain : A Redundant SX-2: C15
*** System Components:
0> HSS-2 1> EXS 2> EXS 3> T3/E3
Active Domain
This field indicates the currently active Shelf Interface Bus on the SX-2
card. The Promina 800 contains two transport buses (A and B) with one
bus active at any given time. Domain A is controlled by the SX-2 cards
installed in the left-most slots (0 and 1) on the high-speed shelf, and
Domain B is controlled by the SX-2 cards installed in the right-most slots
(slots 14 and 15).
For more information, refer to the Switch Domain command in the
Chapter 8, Operator Interface Commands.
DB Status
This field indicates the cards current status in the configuration database.
Values are:
Not InstalledThere is no record in the database.
ActiveThe card is in service.
EnabledThe card is available for testing, but not in service.
DisabledThe card is not in service.
Domain
This field indicates the Shelf Bus Interface card to which this SX-2 card
is connected (A or B).
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 21
Firmware Revision
This field indicates the current revision level of the firmware of the card
physically in the slot.
Redundant SX
This field indicates the card ID of the backup SX-2 card.
Serial Number
This field indicates the serial number of the card physically in the slot.
Slot Type
This field indicates the type of card physically in the slot. Values can be
any card type or None (when there is no card in the slot). The boards
revision level is also displayed.
Status
This field indicates the status of the card. Values are:
NullThe card is not physically in the slot or software can not
communicate with the card.
OnlineThe card is fully functional.
OfflineThe card is fully functional and is the backup.
Failed Clock LockPLL is not locked.
T1 Clock FailureT1 clock is missing or not locked.
PowerupPowerup test is running.
System Components
This field indicates the system component to which the SXI/SXI-2 port is
connected. There are four ports (numbered 0 through 3) on the
SXI/SXI-2. Values are:
HSSThe port connected to a high-speed shelf.
STSThe port is connected to a standard shelf.
EXSThe port is connected to an expansion shelf
T3/E3 (Cxx)The port is connected to a T3 or E3 TRK module; the
card ID is given in parentheses.
NoneThe port is not connected to a system component.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 22 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
BX Card Configuration
Example 4-8 shows an example of the configuration for the BX card. It
includes the slot number of the PPM card (in parentheses) that is
managing the functionality of the card.
Example 4-8 BX Card Configuration Display
*** BX Card N4C46 Configuration (CPU:C3) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: BX (Rev G)
Serial Number: 647273
Status: ONLINE
Domain : A Redundant BX: C47
Active Domain: A SX Port: C0P2
Active Domain
This field indicates the currently active shelf interface bus. The Promina
800 contains two transport buses (A and B), with one bus active at any
given time.
DB Status
This field indicates the cards current status in the configuration database.
Values are:
Not InstalledThere is no record in the database.
ActiveThe card is in service.
Domain
This field indicates the Shelf Interface Bus to which this BX card is
connected.
Serial Number
This field indicates the serial number on the card.
Slot Type
This field indicates the type of card physically in the slot. Values can be
any card type or None (when there is no card in the slot). The boards
revision level is also displayed.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 23
Status
This field indicates the status of the card. Values are listed below.
Card Not PresentThe card is not physically in the slot.
DisabledThe card is in the database but will not be the master nor
accept tasks.
On-lineThe card is fully functional.
Off-lineThe card is fully functional and is the backup.
Redundant BX
This field indicates the card ID of the backup BX card.
SX-2 Port
This field indicates the SXI-2 port ID to which the BXI is connected.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 24 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Console Port Settings
The Console ports on the PPMI are configured through the Set Terminal
Option in the Prolog Procedure Menu.
Note: Prolog Procedure Menu functions do not have corresponding expert
mode commands.
The following options can be configured:
Change terminal speedSets the port speed of the console port
Terminal typeSets the type of operator console (for example,
GLASS TTY or TVI 925)
Terminal functionDetermines what the port is used for (for
example, operator console or alarm monitor)
Terminal limitsSets the disconnect criteria (for example no-activity
interval before disconnect)
The Console (and auxiliary) port settings on a PSMI are configured via
the ins psm or mod psm commands.
Refer to the Operator Interface Command Summary Appendix for
additional information about these commands.
Port speeds must be specified for the console ports to match the terminal
speed of the operator console. Valid port speeds (bps) are 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600 (default), 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200, and
Autobaud (in which the speed of the port is automatically recognized and
matched with the speed of the operator console).
Caution: Never modify the console port speeds for a Promina node running
Release 2.x1 software from an earlier Promina or IDNX node, or vice versa.
Doing so will result in unpredictable changes to the port speed setting.
To view a summary of port speeds and operator console settings, use the
Prolog Procedure Menu option Query Console. A summary display
appears on the screen as shown in Example 4-9.
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 4 - 25
Example 4-9 Querying the Operator Console
PROLOG PROCEDURE MENU TIME NOT SET
NODE 5 CARD 5 CONSOLE PORT 1
* 1 (CON) CONTINUE WITH SESSION
2 (ASS) ASSIGN OPERATOR
3 (REM) REMOVE OPERATOR
4 (OPE) OPERATOR QUERY
5 (SET) SET TERMINAL OPTION
6 (LOG) LOG OUT
7 (LIS) LIST ACTIVE OPERATORS
8 (SEN) SEND MESSAGE
9 (QUE) QUERY CONSOLE
10 (VIR) VIRTUAL CONNECTION
11 (MOD) MODIFY OPERATOR
SELECT PROLOG OPTION
< 9
OK
QUERY consoles on which NODE(S)? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
OK
NODE CARD PORT SPEED TERMINAL FUNCTION TERMINAL TYPE NO-ACT DISC
---- ---- ---- ----- -------- -------- -------- ---- ------ ----
5 5 0 9600 OPERATOR CONSOLE GLASS TTY NEVER NEVER
5 5 1 AUTOBAUD OPERATOR CONSOLE GLASS TTY NEVER NEVER
5 4 0 9600 OPERATOR CONSOLE GLASS TTY NEVER NEVER
5 4 1 AUTOBAUD OPERATOR CONSOLE GLASS TTY NEVER NEVER
HIT CARRIAGE-RETURN TO CONTINUE
Software Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 26 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 5
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 1
5SSC, HTC, and SCLP
Por t s
This chapter describes the operation and usage of the SSC (Secondary
Signaling Channel), the PSC (Primary Signaling Channel) with SCLP
(Signaling Channel Link Protocol), and HTC (HDLC TBus Channel)
ports used to communicate network management information, control
signals and system updates between domains. The topics covered are:
SSC Ports on the PPM, PLM, and IPLM on page 5-1.
SSC Port Installation on page 5-5.
SSC Port Parameters on page 5-7.
HTC Port Installation on page 5-11.
HTC Port Parameters on page 5-14.
PPM, PLM, and IPLM Configurations on page 5-18.
Port Configuration Descriptions on page 5-19.
SCLP/SSC Port Query Displays on page 5-18.
HTC Port Query Displays on page 5-23.
SSC Ports on the PPM, PLM, and IPLM
PPM modules function as the central communications point for
transferring control and signal information to and from other Promina
nodes in a network. PPM modules communicate this signaling
information through Signaling Channel Link Protocol (SCLP), that links
Promina and IDNX nodes in a mixed network.
The Secondary Signaling Channel (SSC) communication information can
pass only through IDNX nodes to other Promina nodes, as IDNX nodes
cannot terminate an SSC port.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Note: The SCLP circuit on all internodal trunks is sometimes referred to as the
primary signalling channel (PSC).
SCLP is used for internodal signaling during call setup, network topology
updates, and network management. In Promina networks, SCLP (not
HDLC) is also used to transport IP packets. SSC can be configured to
carry traditional internodal signaling and IP packets or restricted to
carrying only IP packets. Because SSC can carry internodal traffic, it can
be used to supplement the primary SCLP functionality.
SSC is especially useful in providing extra bandwidth for increased
internodal traffic to accommodate network management activity, Telnet,
Rlogin, FTP, or code loading. Since SSC is configurable it provides a
flexible and scalable internodal communication system that can be used
on an as needed basis.
Like SCLP setups, SSC ports also utilize bandwidth on the links between
nodes as long as a SSC port is activated.
Each PPM, PLM, and IPLM has eight internal ports capable of
supporting SSC. SSC ports utilize a portion of TBus bandwidth allotted to
the processor card. Each SSC port takes one load unit from the processor.
SSC port speeds can be set to 8, 16, or 64 kbps.
SSC channels can be established between processors on Neighbor or
Friend nodes. A SSC channels between Neighbor nodes can transport
traditional internodal signaling as well as IP packets. SSC channels
between Friend nodes must be restricted to IP packets. Refer to the
parameter description for [8] Selected Path on page 5-9 for more
information.
Where an SCLP channel is a dedicated channel between two Promina
nodes and is associated with a bundle or trunk which interconnects those
two nodes, an SSC is an additional supplementary channel which may be
configured to enhance the bandwidth between nodes. Although SCLP in
some instances may allow you to choose the amount of bandwidth used
for that channel (for example, on the TRK-3), it is mandatory to have an
SCLP channel on every internodal bundle or trunk. SSCs, in contrast, are
optional.
Figure 5-1 illustrates SCLP and SSC communication links in a typical
mixed network.
TBus Allocation Both primary and secondary signaling channels use the main TBus phase
allocated for use by the nodal controller (processor). An additional phase
is allocated if an HTC port is activated. The size of this second phase is
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 3
matched to the speed configured for the HTC port. See HTC Port
Parameters on page 5-14 for HTC port speed information.
Figure 5-1 SCLP and IP Transport in a Mixed Network

Node 2
Node 4
Node 1
Node 5
Node 6
Node 7
Node 9
Node 8 Node 3
NMS Workstation SCLP SCLP
S
C
L
P
SCLP
S
C
L
P
S
C
L
P
SCLP
SCLP
SSC
IP Only
SSC
IP Only
Regular SSC
Regular
SSC
S
C
L
P
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
HTC Ports and SNMP Manageability
To enable managability of a Promina network via an ATM network, a
PPM port type has been added which alows a remote network
management platform to connect to the Promina node via a CellXpress
module.
Currently supported on the PPM only, HDLC-encapsulated IP traffic is
routed from the CX module over the TBus. This facility enables remote
SNMP management over an ATM network. Network management
stations can be remotely located from a Promina node and connect to the
Promina SNMP agent via an ATM virtual circuit rather than through the
Prominas rear external Ethernet interface.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 5
SSC Port Installation
SSC port installation is performed following card installation. Make sure
the PPM card is installed before attempting to install ports.
Use the Install Port command to add ports to the configuration database
and make them operational. Use the Query Port command to display an
installed ports configuration. Use the Modify Port command to change
the ports configuration settings.
The general port installation procedure is provided below. An example of
port installation, Example 5-1, is shown after the procedure. All of these
examples assume the operator has already logged in to the Operator
Interface. Following the examples are descriptions of the modifiable
parameters.
To install an SSC port on a PPM module:
1. Use the menu path or expert-mode command shown below to begin
the Install Port command.
Menu Path: CONFIGURATION/INSTALL/PORT
Expert Mode: Install Port
2. The OI prompts for the port ID (the node, card, and port on the card).
Enter the port ID.
The OI also provides the option of copying the configuration of an
installed port. Use this option when installing multiple ports with
identical configurations.
3. Enter the information shown in Table 5-1 for both the origination port
and the answer port on the appropriate nodes:
Table 5-1 Port Parameters for SSC Channels
Parameter Origination Port Answer Port
Orig/Ans Mode ORIG-ONLY ANS-ONLY
Destination Port Device ID for the
answer port
Call/Preempt Priority 15/15
Secondary Call/Preempt Priority
1
15/15
Port Type SSC
Port Speed 8000, 16000, or 64000
Time-of-Day Restrictions NONE
Routing Options DONT CARE
Selected Path
2
NONE
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
4. After entering all parameters, enter YES to confirm that the
parameters are correct. The port is then installed and immediately
activated. When both ports are installed, the SSC channel is
established.
5. Confirm that all port parameters and the destination port ID are
correct, then press the Return key to install the port. The OI displays
the configuration for the port.
Example 5-1 PPM SSC Port Installation
ins po,n87c5p1
Do you want to specify any port filters? [NO]
YES or NO =
Port N87C5P1 is type PPM.
Do you want to install this port? [YES]
YES or NO =
Do you want to copy the configuration of an existing port? [NO]
YES or NO =
*** PPM Port N87C5P1 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ANS-ONLY
[ 3] Port Type = SSC
[ 4] Port Speed = 16000 BPS
[10] IP Only = NO
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX = 0
*** Originate/Answer Modes ***
[ 0]* ANS-ONLY
[ 1] ORIG-ONLY
NOTE: * Marks Default Selection.
Enter Originate/Answer Mode for Port N87C5P1
Data Flow Direction TWO WAY CALL
Selected Path Required
2
NO
IP Only YES (to restrict the channel only to IP traffic
between these two endpoint nodes)
NO (to allow both SCLP and IP traffic;
neighbor nodes only)
1. Secondary Call/Preempt Priority are available only on nodes running software Release
2.x1 or greater.
2. A selected path must be specified for SSC channels that are configured for IP traffic only.
Table 5-1 Port Parameters for SSC Channels
Parameter Origination Port Answer Port
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 7
Orig/Ans Mode = 1
Enter Destination Port
Destination Port ID = n160c0p0
*** PPM Port N87C5P1 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY
[ 1] Destination Port = n160c0p0
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Secondary Call/Prempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0)
[ 4] Port type = SSC
[ 5] Port Speed = 16000 bps
[ 7] Routing Options(TER=DON'T CARE;ENC=DON'T CARE;FIB=DON'T CARE;
ATM=DON'T CARE; SCLX=DON'T CARE)
[ 8] Selected Path = NONE
[10] Selected Path Required = YES
[11] IP Only = NO
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PPM Port N87C5P1 Has Been Installed.
*** Command Complete ***
SSC Port
Parameters
This section describes SSC port parameters and their settings. Port
parameters are displayed whenever a port is installed, queried, or
modified. Some parameters apply only to specific port configurations.
For example, if the port is set as an answer-only port, specific parameters
for originating ports are not displayed.
The modifiable parameters and their descriptions follow.
Note: If configuring the port parameter Maximum Link Cost Routing, the
value range is 0 (lowest) through 1023 (highest). The default is 0 (no limit). For
a given call, if the call attempts to traverse to a set of links whose costs exceed
the origination port or port bundles maximum link cost value, the call will be
prevented from taking that path and rejected on a call by call basis. For
interdomain calls, the cumulative link cost is reset upon entering a transit and/or
destination domain. This means the cumulative link cost is bounded on a per
domain basis for interdomain calls.
[0] Orig/Ans Mode
The options are Ans-only (default) and Orig-only.
This parameter allows the user to specify whether the port can answer
calls (only) or originate calls (only).
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
[1] Destination Port
This parameter is required only for originate-only ports.
The value is the port ID for the destination port that communicates with
the origination port.
For permanent calls, when the same begin and end time is specified, the
call is torn down and replaced every day at that time. This technique can
be used to optimize the path used. The call will not be torn down when it
is already on an optimal path.
[2] Call/Preempt Priority
These parameter values apply only to originate-only ports.
The range for Call Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest). The default
is 7. The range for Preempt Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest).
The default is 0.
Although they appear as one item, these are two independent parameters.
They work together to determine which call is placed or reconnected.
Call priority determines the order in which a call originating from this
port is reconnected when the port is interrupted for any reason. A port
with a high call priority is reconnected before ports of lower call priority,
but after ports of higher call priority. When all ports have the same call
priority, there is no particular order for reconnection.
Call priority is also used to determine whether a call originating on a port
can be preempted when there is insufficient bandwidth on the link to
handle all calls. Call priority and preempt priority work together in
making this determination.
Preempt priority is used when there is not enough bandwidth to complete
a call. The preempt priority value assigned to the call is compared to the
call priority value assigned to other calls on the link to determine which
calls should be preempted. Calls having a call priority value lower than
the value of the preempt priority call are preempted. The preempted call
is placed when enough bandwidth is recovered.
To prevent certain calls originating on other ports from being preempted,
assign them a call priority that is higher than the value of the preempt
priority. Although preempt priority allows the call to obtain bandwidth, it
does not mean that the call will be completed when the destination port is
busy.
Permanent calls are attempted continually regardless of any external
activation. (A path through the network is dedicated between origination
and destination ports.) Demand calls are assigned bandwidth when the
port goes off-hook and then unassigned when the port goes on-hook.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 9
[3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority
The range for Secondary Call Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest).
The default is 7. The range for Secondary Preempt Priority is 0 (lowest)
through 15 (highest). The default is 0.
This parameter provides a secondary call and preempt priority to be used
if the optimal path is not available. If the call tries to build an non-optimal
path, and it tries to preempt other calls on the non-optimal path, then
specified values for secondary call and secondary preempt priority are
used for the call.
[4] Port Type
The value is SSC (default).
For an SSC port the Port Type parameter should be set to: SSC ONLY.
[5] Port Speed
The options are 8, 16 (default), or 64.
The SCC Port Speed parameter can be set to 8, 16, or 64 kbps.
[7] Routing Options
The options are Dont Care (default), Prefer Not, Preferred, and
Required.
This parameter specifies the routing requirements for terrestrial routing,
encryption routing, ATM routing, SCLX routing, and fiber routing.
Use the routing options parameter to specify the routing method for a
specific application. For example, selecting Fiber can indicate any
operator-defined routing method.
Dont CareSpecifies that any available path is used.
Prefer NotSpecifies that certain paths are used when no other paths
are available. The call is not blocked.
PreferredSpecifies that certain paths are used first. When those
paths are not available, any path is used. The call is not blocked.
RequiredSpecifies that only certain paths can be used. When those
paths are not available, the call is blocked.
[8] Selected Path
The values are None (default) or the applicable node IDs.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Up to 12 node IDs, including intermediate nodes and the destination
node, can be specified in a selected path. When specifying more than one
node, separate the node IDs with a comma. The same node cannot be
specified more than once.
This parameter allows the user to override the system and specify the path
the call takes through the network. When creating a path, confirm that it
meets the ports routing attributes. Up to 31 selected paths can be created.
Only one path can be specified per port, but specified paths can be shared
among ports.
After a path is created, it is placed in the path select table, where it can be
queried or deleted. When a path is deleted from the path select table, all
ports using that path are changed to None.
When the Selected Path Required parameter is set to No, and the Selected
Path is not specified or available, the system determines the best path. If
the Selected Path Required parameter is set to Yes, the port will retry
when the selected path is unavailable. (See the parameter description for
[10] Selected Path Required below for additional information.)
If parameter [11] IP Only is set to No, [10] Selected Path Required must
be set to Yes. When [11] IP Only is set to No, then SSC port will carry
SCLP traffic as well as IP traffics, and the call can only go one hop (that
is, to a neighbor node).
[10] Selected Path Required
The values are No (default) or Yes.
This parameter specifies whether the use of the Selected Path is required
or not. If Yes is selected, calls can be routed only via the Selected Path.
If the Selected Path is not available, then the call will not be built, but the
system will retry the call as set in the Call Processing Parameters when
the node was configured. (Refer to the Node Management manual for
additional information on call retries.)
When the IP Only parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is always set to
Yes.
[11] IP Only
The options are No (default) or Yes.
The IP Only parameter can be set to:
YesRestricts the port to IP packets only
NoAllows IP and NON-IP Packets signals
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 11
HTC Port Installation
HTC port installation is performed following card installation. Make sure
the nodal controller (processor) card is installed before attempting to
install ports.
The intended connection for the HTC port is to a CX VBR Port bundle.
This configuration allows a Panavue workstation to connect to a Promina
node via an ATM VC.
Only one HTC port can be configured per nodal controller (processor)
card.
The parameters for the PPM are PLM are the same, and the same port
configuration procedures apply to each. Use the Install Port command to
add ports to the configuration database and make them operational. Use
the Query Port command to display an installed ports configuration.
Use the Modify Port command to change the ports configuration
settings. PPM and PLM cards have port parameters that can be modified.
The general port installation procedure is provided below. An example of
port installation, Example 5-2, is shown after the procedure. All of these
examples assume the operator has already logged in to the Operator
Interface. Following the examples are descriptions of the modifiable
parameters.
To install an HTC port on a PPM:
1. Use the menu path or expert-mode command shown below to begin
the Install Port command.
Menu Path: CONFIGURATION/INSTALL/PORT
Expert Mode: Install Port
2. The OI prompts for the port ID (the node, card, and port on the card).
Enter the port ID.
The OI also provides the option of copying the configuration of an
installed port. Use this option when installing multiple ports with
identical configurations.
3. Enter the information shown in Table 5-2 for both the origination port
and the answer port on the appropriate nodes:
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
4. After entering all parameters, enter YES to confirm that the
parameters are correct. The port is then installed and immediately
activated. When both ports are installed, the HTC channel is
established.
5. Confirm that all port parameters and the destination port ID are
correct, then press the Return key to install the port. The OI displays
the configuration for the port.
Table 5-2 Port Parameters for HTC Channels
Parameter Origination Port Answer Port
Orig/Ans Mode ORIG-ONLY ANS-ONLY
Destination Port Device ID for the
answer port
Call/Preempt Priority 15/15
Secondary Call/Preempt Priority
1

1. Secondary Call/Preempt Priority are available only on nodes running software Release
2.x1 or greater.
15/15
Port Type HTC
Port Speed Supported speeds are 64000, 128000,
192000, and 256000 bps.
Time-of-Day Restrictions NONE
Routing Options DONT CARE
Selected Path
2

2. A selected path must be specified for SSC channels that are configured for IP traffic only.
NONE
Selected Path Required
2
NO
IP The IP address associated with the HTC port.
Master only: YES
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 13
Example 5-2 PPM HTC Port Installation
Enter 'NORMAL' to return to normal command mode.
Enter command [DELETE PORT]
< ins po,c12p0/y


Port N168C12P0 is type 'PPM'.
Do you want to install this port? [YES]
YES OR NO =


Do you want to copy the configuration of an existing port? [NO]
YES OR NO =


*** PPM Port N168C12P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ANS-ONLY
[ 4] Port Type = SSC
[ 5] Port Speed = 16000 bps
[11] IP Only = NO

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX = 4


*** HTC port must be ORIG ONLY ***

Enter destination bundle
DESTINATION BUNDLE ID = N168C28B0


*** PPM Port N168C12P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY (Dest Bundle is ANS-ONLY)
[ 1] Destination Bundle = N168C28B0 (Dest Bundle is CX)
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Sec Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 4] Port Type = HTC
[ 5] Port Speed = 64000 bps (Dest Bundle is 256000)
[ 7] Routing Options (TER=DON'T CARE; ENC=DON'T CARE; FIB=DON'T CARE)
[12] IP Address = 0.0.0.0
[13] Master Only = NO

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX = 12

Enter IP Addr:
IP ADDRESS = 192.168.2.2


*** PPM Port N168C12P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY (Dest Bundle is ANS-ONLY)
[ 1] Destination Bundle = N168C28B0 (Dest Bundle is CX)
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Sec Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 4] Port Type = HTC
[ 5] Port Speed = 64000 bps (Dest Bundle is 256000)
[ 7] Routing Options (TER=DON'T CARE; ENC=DON'T CARE; FIB=DON'T CARE)
[12] IP Address = 192.168.2.2
[13] Master Only = NO

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
PARAMETER INDEX = 5

Valid speeds for HTC Ports are:
64000 128000 192000 256000
Enter Port Speed (BPS) for port N168C12P0 [64000]
Port Speed (BPS) = 256000


*** PPM Port N168C12P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY (Dest Bundle is ANS-ONLY)
[ 1] Destination Bundle = N168C28B0 (Dest Bundle is CX)
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Sec Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 4] Port Type = HTC
[ 5] Port Speed = 256000 bps (Dest Bundle is 256000)
[ 7] Routing Options (TER=DON'T CARE; ENC=DON'T CARE; FIB=DON'T CARE)
[12] IP Address = 192.168.2.2
[13] Master Only = NO

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX = 13


*** PPM Port N168C12P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY (Dest Bundle is ANS-ONLY)
[ 1] Destination Bundle = N168C28B0 (Dest Bundle is CX)
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Sec Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 4] Port Type = HTC
[ 5] Port Speed = 256000 bps (Dest Bundle is 256000)
[ 7] Routing Options (TER=DON'T CARE; ENC=DON'T CARE; FIB=DON'T CARE)
[12] IP Address = 192.168.2.2
[13] Master Only = YES

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =


Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =

*** PPM Port N168C12P0 has been INSTALLED.

*** PPM Port N168C12P0 has been ACTIVATED.


*** Command Complete ***
HTC Port
Parameters
This section describes HTC port parameters and their settings. Port
parameters are displayed whenever a port is installed, queried, or
modified. Some parameters apply only to specific port configurations.
For example, if the port is set as an answer-only port, specific parameters
for originating ports are not displayed.
The modifiable parameters and their descriptions follow.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 15
Note: If configuring the port parameter Maximum Link Cost Routing, the
value range is 0 (lowest) through 1023 (highest). The default is 0 (no limit). For
a given call, if the call attempts to traverse to a set of links whose costs exceed
the origination port or port bundles maximum link cost value, the call will be
prevented from taking that path and rejected on a call by call basis. For
interdomain calls, the cumulative link cost is reset upon entering a transit and/or
destination domain. This means the cumulative link cost is bounded on a per
domain basis for interdomain calls.
[0] Orig/Ans Mode
The option is Orig-only.
This parameter allows the user to specify that the port can originate calls
(only).
[1] Destination Port
This parameter is required only for originate-only ports.
The value is the port ID for the destination port that communicates with
the origination port.
Note: When configuring an HTC port, the destination port must be on a CX
module.
[2] Call/Preempt Priority
These parameter values apply only to originate-only ports.
The range for Call Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest). The default
is 7. The range for Preempt Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest).
The default is 0.
For the complete description see [2] Call/Preempt Priority on page 5-8.
[3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority
The range for Secondary Call Priority is 0 (lowest) through 15 (highest).
The default is 7. The range for Secondary Preempt Priority is 0 (lowest)
through 15 (highest). The default is 0.
For more information see [3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority on page
5-9.
[4] Port Type
The value is HTC.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
HTC is the mode which connects the nodal controller (processor) to the
HDLC port on a CX module. In addition, this parameter allows you to
specify a port type of SSC.
[5] Port Speed
Supported speed are 64000, 128000, 192000, and 256000 bps.
Note: A second TBus phase allocation will accommodate the HTC port
bandwidth.
[7] Routing Options
The options are Dont Care (default), Prefer Not, Preferred, and
Required.
This parameter specifies the routing requirements for terrestrial routing,
encryption routing, ATM routing, and fiber routing.
For a description of the routing options parameter values see [7] Routing
Options on page 5-9.
[8] Selected Path
The values are None (default) or the applicable node IDs.
Up to 12 node IDs, including intermediate nodes and the destination
node, can be specified in a selected path. When specifying more than one
node, separate the node IDs with a comma. The same node cannot be
specified more than once.
[10] Selected Path Required
The values are No (default) or Yes.
This parameter specifies whether the use of the Selected Path is required
or not. If Yes is selected, calls can be routed only via the Selected Path.
If the Selected Path is not available, then the call will not be built, but the
system will retry the call as set in the Call Processing Parameters when
the node was configured. (Refer to the Node Management manual for
additional information on call retries.)
[12] IP
The IP address associated with the HTC port. This is the address that will
be used as the "gateway" address when adding an IPA route. Once the
IPA is either defined or referred, the IP Gateway needs to be installed
before an HTC port will allow IP Connectivity to the Promina node.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 17
[13] Master-only
This field is only visible when the port is configured for ORIG-ONLY. If
set to YES, the port will only attempt to build if it is on a Master
processor.
HTC port is intended to facilitate SNMP management through
Panavue workstation at a remote location with ATM connectivity.
A single connection is allowed between a Panavue workstation and a
Promina processor.
Redundancy. When a processor fails and redundant processors are
available the node recovers. The HTC port configuration is processor
module-specific.
You can use the Master-only parameter to configure a recoverable HTC
port configuration (where only one PPM module will activate its HTC
port).
To use the Master-only parameter for redundancy, follow these steps:
1. Configure HTC ports on all processors as ORIG-ONLY with the
destination port being the same CX VBR port bundle.
2. Set the Master-only parameter to YES.
3. Make sure that the ports in CX VBR port bundle are ANS-only.
When the Master-only parameter is set to YES, the HTC port will only
build if that port resides on a card configured as a master CPU.
In the node, one and only one HTC port call can be built. This one call
will always be built on the master processor. When redundant processors
are available and the master fails, the new master brings the HTC call
back up on the same CX bundle.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
SCLP/SSC Port Query Displays
After ports are installed, the operator can query the port through the
Operator Interface to display the ports current configuration. Example
5-3 shows the configuration display for SSC ports when the port and the
card is queried. Descriptions of the configuration fields are provided after
the example.
PPM, PLM,
and IPLM
Configurations
Example 5-3 SSC Configuration Display
< q port, c0p0/d
*** PLM PORT N11C0P0 CONFIGURATION (DEST PORT IS PORT N14C0P0) ***
N11C0P0 N14C0P0 N11C0P0 N14C0P0
CARD TYPE: PLM PLM SLOT TYPE: PLM PLM
DBCARD STATUS: ACTIVE ACTIVE DB PORT STATUS: ACTIVE ACTIVE
ORIG/ANS MODE: ORIG-ONLY ANS-ONLY DEST PORT: N14C0P0
PORT SPEED: 1600 16000
PORT TYPE: SSC SSC
IP ONLY: YES YES
CALL PRIORITY: 14 PREEMPT PRTY: 10
Sec CALL PRIORITY: 9 Sec PREEMPT PRTY: 5
TERR ROUTING: DON'T CARE TOD RESTRICT: NONE
ENCRY ROUTING: DON'T CARE
FIBER ROUTING: DON'T CARE
ATM ROUTING: DONT CARE
SCLX ROUTING: DONT CARE
SELECTED PATH: (INDEX 1) 11-14
PATH REQUIRED: NO
ACTUAL PATH: 11-14 (OP)
DATA FLOW DIRECTION: TWO WAY CALL
*** PLM PORT N11C0P0 STATUS ***
CALL STATE: CALL IN PROGRESS LAST DISCONNECT: NONE
LINK STATUS: UP for 15467 seconds to N86C3P1
PKTS RECVD: 44 (FOR LAST 731 SECONDS)
PKTS SENT: 28 (FOR LAST 731 SECONDS)
*** HIT RETURN TO CONTINUE (ESCAPE TO QUIT) ***

*** COMMAND COMPLETE ***
< q car, c4/d
*** PPM Card N22C4 Configuration (Cpu:C4) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: PPM (Rev A)
Serial Number: 692920
Idle Time: 92 Bytes of RAM Left: 8042216
RTC overruns: 0 CBUS Interrupts/Second: 0
Alarm Panel I/F: ENABLED Cpu Status: MASTER
DB Checksum: 446D21
Perm Boot Version: 1.20 Code Version: 1.41.39
Wrt Boot Version: 1.28
Load Units: 24 Current GMT: 19:40:41
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 19
Power Up: 66:42:43 ago Restart: 66:42:43 ago
CPU Restart Count: 3 Task Restart Count: 1
*** Console Port Configuration ***
Console Port 0: Speed=AUTOBAUD Type=GLASS TTY Mode=OPERATOR CONSOLE
*** Task Distribution ***
PSC/SCLP : 13 26 27 36 129 130
CAS : 24 25 37
T3 TRUNK : 13
PKT INTERFACE : 39
TRK3 TRUNK : 22
Number of Installed SSC Ports: 2
Internal IP Addr: 21.0.1.99
Gatewy IP Addr: 20.0.1.97
*** Hit RETURN to continue (ESCAPE to quit) ***
Port Configuration
Descriptions
The following list describes the fields of the port configuration display.
Since the configuration display does not have numbered fields, the fields
are described here in alphabetical order.
ATM Routing
See [7] Routing Options on page 5-9.
Call Priority
Refer to [2] Call/Preempt Priority on page 5-8.
Call State
Indicates the current condition of the call when the port is queried. Valid
states are as follows:
Idle/DownWhen port is waiting to originate or answer a call.
Verify/DownWhen originating side is waiting verification of
destination parameter.
Placing/DownWhen originating side is building call to destination.
Transitory.
Up/DownWhen call is up but link is down.
Up/Out AlignWhen call is up but link is out of alignment.
Up/In AlignWhen call is up but link is in alignment.
Up/ProvingWhen call is up but link is proving stability.
Up/Align UpWhen call is up and link has just proved aligned.
Up/UpWhen call is up and the link is up.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Card Status
This field indicates whether the PPM or PLM card is Active, Enabled,
Deactivated, or Disabled in the database. It also indicates if the card has
Failed Self-test.
Card Type
For SSC ports this field will be PPM or PLM.
Destination Port
The port ID specified in this field identifies the other end of the call if this
card originates the call.
Encry Routing
Refer to [7] Routing Options on page 5-9.
Fiber Routing
Refer to [7] Routing Options on page 5-9.
Installed Port
When a PPM or PLM card is queried, this field indicates the number of
installed ports.
Last Disconnect
This field indicates the reason why the call terminated. Following are
possible reasons for disconnect:
Call BlockedCall is blocked because there are no resources
available.
Dest BusyThe destination port already has a call in progress, or a
slave condition exists.
Dest ErrorA network error occurred at the destination node, or a
possible configuration problem exists.
Dest TimeoutThe node exceeded the amount of time required to
connect a call on the destination node.
Duplicate CallThe node believes a call is already placed to or from
a port when a request for a new call is made.
Hang UpThis side or the other side hung up.
Invalid Task AddressThe destination port was not installed.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 21
No PathThere is no network path for the call.
Task TimeoutThe call was not completed because the task did not
receive a response from the software. When the origination port is
active and the destination port is disabled, this condition can occur.
TBus FaultA negative acknowledgment was received from the
TBus when a request for a call was made.
Timeout On Charge PktThe origination port did not receive a call
answer message within the required time.
Link Status
This field indicates the current status of the SCLP/SSC link. The values
are:
Up [number]The length of time the SCLP has been communicating
with its neighbor node.
Down [number] The length of time the link has been unavailable.
IdleThe SCLP is not attempting to communicate.
AligningThe SCLP is trying to align with its neighbor node.
Orig/Ans Mode
Refer to [0] Orig/Ans Mode on page 5-7.
Pkts Recvd
This field indicates the how many SCLP/SSC packet messages have been
received in the last X seconds. The counter resets itself every 20 minutes.
Pkts Sent
This field indicates the how many SCLP/SSC packet messages have been
sent in the last X seconds. The counter resets itself every 20 minutes.
Port Speed
This field indicates the SSC Port Speed.
Port Status
This field indicates the current port status in the configuration database.
ActiveThe port is available for normal operation, such as call
processing, tune, loop, test.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 22 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
EnabledThe port is out of service but available for testing; no call
processing can take place.
DisabledThe port is out of service and not available for testing.
Port Type
Refer to [4] Port Type on page 5-9.
Preempt Prty
Refer to [2] Call/Preempt Priority on page 5-8.
SCLX Routing
See [7] Routing Options on page 5-9.
Sec Call Priority
Refer to [3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority on page 5-9.
Sec Prmt Priority
Refer to [3] Secondary Call/Preempt Priority on page 5-9.
Terr Routing
Refer to [7] Routing Options on page 5-9.
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 5 - 23
HTC Port Query Displays
After ports are installed, the operator can query the port through the
Operator Interface to display the ports current configuration. Example
5-4 shows the detailed display for HTC ports and Example 5-5 shows the
summary display. Descriptions of the configuration fields are provided
after the example.
Example 5-4 HTC Port - Detailed Query Display
Enter 'NORMAL' to return to normal command mode.
Enter command [QUERY PORT]
< q po,c13p0/d


*** PPM Port N168C13P0 Configuration (Dest Bundle is N168C28B0) ***
N168C13P0 N168C28B0 N168C13P0
N168C28B0
Card Type: PPM CX Slot Type: PPM CX
DBCard Status: ACTIVE ACTIVE DB Port Status: ACTIVE
ACTIVE
Orig/Ans Mode: ORIG-ONLY ANS-ONLY Dest Bundle: N168C28B0
Port Speed: 256000 256000
Port Type: HTC
IP Address: 192.168.2.2
Master Only: YES
Call Priority: 7 Preempt Prty: 0
Sec Call Prty: 7 Sec Prmt Prty: 0
Terr Routing: DON'T CARE
Encry Routing: DON'T CARE
Fiber Routing: DON'T CARE
ATM Routing: DON"T CARE
SCLX Routing: DONT CARE
Actual Path: 168-168 (OP)

*** PPM Port N168C13P0 Status ***
Call State: Up/Up Last Disconnect: NONE

*** Command Complete ***
Example 5-5 HTC Port- Summary Query Display
Enter 'NORMAL' to return to normal command mode.
Enter command [QUERY PORT]
< q po,c13p0/s
Card Crd Prt Compr/ Prity Org/
Port ID * Type Sta Sta Speed Ca Pr Ans Dest Port Call State
----------- - ----- --- --- ---------- -- -- --- ----------------- ------------
N168C13P0 * PPM ACT ACT 256.0 7 0 Org N168C28P0 Up/Up

*** Command Complete ***
SSC, HTC, and SCLP Ports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 24 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 6
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 1
6 Pr omi na 800 Syst em
This chapter describes hardware configurations and specifications for the
rack- and cabinet-mounted Promina 800 systems. The Promina 800
components are described in these sections:
Promina 800 Configurations on page 6-2.
System Hardware on page 6-3.
Configuration Specifications on page 6-4.
Physical Dimensions on page 6-7.
Promina 800 Shelves on page 6-15.
Power Supplies on page 6-29.
Power Distribution Units on page 6-30.
Fan Tray Assemblies on page 6-50.
Standard Equipment Modules on page 6-53.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina 800 Configurations
The Promina 800 system is modular in design and available in two
standard configurations:
the standard Promina 800 STS
the expansion Promina 800 EXS
The system standard equipment modules, feature modules, power
supplies, and optional equipment are installed in the Promina 800
shelves.
STS Shelf The standard Promina 800 STS configuration consists of the following
shelves:
one high-speed shelf (HSS-2)
one standard shelf (STS)
The Promina 800 STS configuration and three additional 12-slot standard
shelves can be either rack- or cabinet-mounted.
EXS Shelf The expansion Promina 800 EXS configuration consists of the following
shelves:
one high-speed shelf (HSS-2)
one expansion shelf (EXS)
Note: The Promina 800 EXS configuration is only a cabinet-mounted system. It
can include three additional 16-slot expansion shelves in a single cabinet.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 3
System Hardware
The standard Promina 800 system hardware, with a minimum of two
shelves, is expandable to meet future network requirements. Table 6-1
lists the available Promina 800 system hardware components for
redundant and nonredundant configurations.
Table 6-1 Promina 800 System Hardware
Shelves Hardware
1 to 2 HSS-2 (shelf 0, 1)
1 to 7 STS or EXS
1 to 5 Promina Processor Modules (PPM)
load-sharing multiprocessor (redundant systems)
1 to 2 Promina Server Modules (PSM) in the STS or EXS
one hard drive per PSM
one Ethernet workstation connection per PSM
1 Service modem
1 to 2 BXs per STS or EXS shelf
2 to 4 Power supplies per power supply tray
1 to 4 SX-2 per HSS-2
1 Power Distribution Unit (PDU) per cabinet
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Configuration Specifications
You must calculate the following configuration specifications when
designing the Promina 800 system:
the processing capability of the Promina Processor Module (PPM)
the number of PPMs required
the logical slots/applications bandwidth
the power requirements for shelves and modules
net.com systems engineers can assist in calculating these specifications.
Load Units A load unit is a measure of the processing capacity of the nodes
processing modules. Load units compare the processing power available
for each PPM card to the processing power required for other cards in the
system. If the number of load units required exceeds the load units
available, install another PPM card. An net.com systems engineer can
assist in the load unit calculations.
A redundant Promina 800 must have a minimum of two PPMs, up to a
maximum configuration of five PPMs. Each PPM provides 64 load units
distributed as follows:
Seven load unitsrequired from the master processor for call
processing and other nodal functions
Four load unitsprovided for overhead
53 load unitsavailable for other modules
Each additional PPM provides 64 additional load units for other modules.
In some instances, the amount of available RAM on the PPM can
constrain the software functionality and the PPM processing capacity. If
this happens, a PPM cannot use its normal set of load units (53 or 64). To
ensure that the processing capacity of each PPM is not constrained, the
PPM memory is upgradable from 16 Mb (minimum) to 32 Mb
(maximum) using industry standard SIMMs. Refer to the Promina
System Components chapter of this manual for a list of modules requiring
load units and load unit capacities.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 5
Logical Slots Logical slots measure a modules usage of backplane bandwidth. You
must calculate whether a configuration requirement exceeds the logical
slot constraints for a shelf. An net.com System Engineer can assist in
calculating the backplane bandwidth.
The Promina 800 supports 16 logical slots per shelf with a maximum of
eight shelves for a total of 112 (STS) or 128 (EXS) logical slots. If the
number of logical slots exceeds the shelf limit, the modules need to be
rearranged. The number of logical slots required for data port modules
depends on the port speed specified for each card.
Note: For example, only four PPMs can be installed in a single HSS-2 shelf if
four T3 modules are installed; because of logical slot usage, four T3 modules
consume 12 logical slots, leaving only four slots for PPMs. Each offline T3 uses
the same number of logical slots as an online T3.
Refer to the Chapter 7, Promina System Components in this manual for
logical slot requirements and data port module logical slot requirements
based on port speeds for all Promina systems.
Module Power
Consumption
Module power requirements must be considered when configuring a shelf
and determining the system power loading factor. Current consumption
(Amps, labeled A) for all modules is measured at +5.0 V DC, -5.1 V DC,
+12 V DC and -12 V DC with no activity on the modules. Actual values
should not vary more than 5 percent from those listed in the Promina
System Components chapter. Any combination of modules in any given
Promina 800 shelf must not exceed the shelfs power supply
specifications.
Shelf power consumption is determined by adding the power for the front
cards and the rear interface cards. Refer to the Promina System
Components chapter of this manual for Promina 800 module power
consumption.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Electrical and
Environmental
Specifications
Table 6-2 lists the Promina 800 electrical and environmental
specifications. Promina 800 power-related specifications must meet
National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.
Table 6-2 Electrical and Environmental Specifications
Nominal input voltages
100 to 240 V (AC)
-48 and -60 V (DC)
Input voltage frequency
47 to 63 Hz (AC)
Operating conditions
Temperature: 5 to 40
o
C at -200 to 5,000 ft.
5 to 25
o
C at 5,001 to 10,000 ft.
Humidity: 20 to 95% noncondensing
Storage conditions
Temperature: 0 to 70
o
C
Humidity: 8 to 95% noncondensing
Altitude: -200 to 40,000 ft. above sea level
Acoustical noise level
Should not exceed 70 dB-A at 20
o
C
Cooling
Internal forced convection
Regulatory standards (meets
or exceeds)
UL 1950, EN60950
IEC 950
EN41003
CSA-C22.2 No. 950
FCC part 15, Class A
EN50081-1, EN55022A
EN50082-1
AC Power and Power Connectors
Power connector NEMA L6-20P 3-prong twist-lock plug. Two plugs are
supplied for each AC PDU.
Power draw at the circuit 20 A maximum for one cabinet (1 to 4 shelves).
40 A maximum for two cabinets (5 to 8 shelves) or two
separate 20 A circuits.
DC Power and Power Connectors
Promina power connector Terminal block for 6 to 8 AWG multistrand wire.
Power draw at the circuit 60 A maximum for one cabinet (1 to 4 shelves)
120 A maximum for two cabinets (5 to 8 shelves) or
two separate 60 A circuits.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 7
Physical Dimensions
Table 6-3 lists the hardware equipment and chassis dimensions and
weights for the Promina 800 STS and EXS systems. Dimenstions may
vary slightly. Maximum weight (Max.) is based on a fully populated shelf
with maximum cooling fans installed, while standard weight (Std.) for a
chassis includes no boards. (Weights are approximate. net.com system
engineers can provide more precise measurements when needed.)
Caution: To ensure proper cooling and EMC compliance, EXS shelves and
supporting equipment are mounted in an net.com Promina cabinet only. DC
powered Promina shelves must be mounted in Promina cabinets without front
cabinet doors.
Table 6-3 Physical Dimensions
Equipment
Height
in/cm
Width
in/cm
Depth
in/cm
Weight
lbs/kg
HSS-2 shelf 13.9/35.3 19.0/48.3 17.6/44.7 40.0/18.2 Std.
60.0/27.3 Max.
STS shelf 16.8/42.7 19.0/48.3 21.7/55.0 (DC)
20.0/50.0 (AC)
44.0/20.0 Std.
64.0/29.1 Max
EXS shelf 10.5/26.7 19.0/48.3 15.2/38.6 43.2/19.7 Std.
63.2/28.8 Max.
Power supplies and shelf 7.0/17.8 19.0/48.3 18.0/45.7 15.2/6.9
Cabinet DC Power distribution unit
(Vertical Mount)
3.3/8.4 19.0/48.3 10.0/25.4 21.5/9.8
Cabinet DC Power distribution unit
(Horizongal Mount)
1.7.4.3 17.3/43.9 18.0/45.7 13.2/6.0
Cabinet AC Power distribution unit
(Vertical Mount)
3.3/8.4 19.0/48.3 10.0/25.4 16.4/7.5
Cabinet AC Power distribution unit
(Horizontal Mount)
1.7/4.3 17.3/43.9 18.0/45.7 14.4/6.5
Intake fan assembly tray 1.7/4.3 19.0/48.3 18.5/47.0 11.0/5.0
Alarm panel/fan assembly tray
(no fans)
1.7/4.3 19.0/48.3 22.4/56.8 3.8/1.7
T1 jackfield 1.7/4.3 19.0/48.3 22.4/56.8 14.5/6.6
Thermostatically controlled fan
assembly
1.7/4.3 19.0/48.3 22.4/56.8 14.5/6.6
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Table 6-4 and Table 6-5 lists the Promina 800 cabinet dimensions and
weights. Cabinet weights are based on a redundant and fully populated
shelf system with maximum cooling fans installed.
Table 6-4 Promina 800 Cabinet Dimensions
Cabinet Configuration Dimensions in/cm
Cabinet dimensions 84.0/213.4 high
23.8/60.5 wide
34.9/88.7 deep (including front door thickness)
Doors
Front
Rear
(extended from chassis when fully open)
23.0/58.4
21.0/53.4
Minimum floor space 24.0/61.0 width
34.9/88.7 depth (not including clearance for opening doors)
76.5/194.3 depth (including clearance for both doors)
Cabinet mounting Caster-mount with screw-type stabilizing feet
Table 6-5 Promina 800 Cabinet Weights
Configuration Weight lbs/kg
Single cabinet, empty and uncrated 319/145
One Cabinet STS Configuration (weight with PDU, jackfield, fans, and HSS on first shelf)
1-STS
2-STS
3-STS
442/202
507/231
571/260
Two Cabinet STS Configuration (weight with PDU, jackfield, and fans)
1-STS
2-STS
3-STS
4-STS
383/174
447/203
511/233
575/262
One Cabinet EXS Configuration (weight with door, PDU, jackfield, fans and HSS on first shelf)
1-EXS, 1-Power supply shelf
2-EXS, 1-Power supply shelf
3-EXS, 2-Power supply shelves
460/209
523/238
604/275
Two Cabinet EXS Configuration (weight with door, PDU, jackfield, and fans)
1-EXS, 1-Power supply shelf
2-EXS, 1-Power supply shelf
3-EXS, 2-Power supply shelves
4-EXS, 2-Power supply shelves
400/182
463/211
544/248
607/276
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 9
Rack-mount
System
A Promina 800 with STS shelves can be rack-mounted. Each rack mount
space is approximately 1.75 inches (4.45 cm).
Note: The Promina 800 EXS configuration is only a cabinet-mounted system.
Figure 6-1 shows a rack-mounted Promina 800 system with one HSS-2,
one STS, and optional equipment.
Figure 6-1 Rack-mounted Promina 800 with HSS-2 and STS
Cabinet-
mounted Systems
There are two Promina cabinet versions available for mounting Promina
systems:
EMI cabinet (front and rear door enclosure)
Non-EMI cabinet (rear door only)
The cabinet-mounted Promina 800 can accommodate three additional
12-slot STS or three 16-slot EXS shelves in the seven-foot cabinet in
addition to the one required HSS-2 and one STS or EXS shelf.
The EMI Promina cabinet front door is equipped with a single locking
front-mounted latch. The cabinet door is kept closed to minimize
electromagnetic interference (EMI) and assure adequate cooling.
Removable
Front Door
Removable
Front Panel
T1 Jackfield
(optional)
Telco Rack
(optional)
HSS
STS
Power Supplies
Plenum
Alarm Panel
(optional)
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-2 illustrates the front cabinet door with a recessed handle.
Figure 6-2 Opening Cabinet Door
Front View
Side View
Front View
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 11
Figure 6-3 shows the floor space requirements for an net.com Promina
800 cabinet.
Figure 6-3 Promina 800 Floor Space Requirements
Warning: To prevent exposure to electric shock, do not remove the cabinet
door. There are no customer serviceable parts inside; refer service and
installation questions to qualified service personnel.
23.8"
(60.5 cm)
(58.4 cm)
23.0"
21.0" minimum
(53.4 cm)
Front
Rear Door
Door
7'-0"
(213.4 cm)
32.4 (plus 2.5 with front door thickness when closed)
(82.3 cm + 6.4 cm)
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-4 shows a cabinet-mounted Promina 800 system with one
HSS-2, five STSs, optional alarm panel, and jackfield assemblies.
Figure 6-4 Promina 800 Cabinet, STS Version
Caution: Remove the cabinet door key to prevent it from breaking off in the lock
when the adjacent cabinet door swings open.
STS 3
STS 2
STS 1
HSS-0
Alarm Cut Off
Audible Disable
Alarm
Alarm Panel/Fans
Test
STS 4
STS 5
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 13
Figure 6-5 shows a cabinet-mounted Promina 800 with one HSS-2, seven
EXSs, and jackfield assemblies. EXS shelves must be mounted in an
net.com cabinet.
Figure 6-5 Promina 800 Cabinet, EXS Version

EXS 7
EXS 6
Air Space
Fans
BX Cards
Intake Fan Assembly
Power Supplies
~ ~
Air Space
HSS-0
PPM Cards
SX-2 Cards
SX-2 Cards
BX Cards
Trunk Card
PSM Card
EXS 2
EXS 3
Alarm Panel (optional) / Fan
Power Supplies
Power Supplies
Power Distribution Unit
Voice Card
Power Supply Tray
EXS 1
~ ~
Air Space
T3-jackfield
(optional)
EXS 5
EXS4
BX Cards ~ ~
Power Supplies
Air Space
Power Distribution Unit
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Cabinet Grounding
A ground cable (shown in Figure 6-6) connecting a multi-cabinet
Promina 800 balances the ground voltage between the cabinet power
sources.
Figure 6-6 Ground Cable
HSS Shelf
Grounding Cabling
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 15
Promina 800 Shelves
Three types of Promina 800 shelves are supported:
HSS-2 (High Speed Shelf)
STS (Standard Shelf)
EXS (Expansion Shelf)
Shelf
Configurations
Promina 800 shelf configurations are listed in Table 6-6.
Optional Cabinet
Equipment
The following equipment is optional for the Promina 800 HSS-2 and
STS.
one auxiliary fan tray for EXS shelves only
one alarm panel
one T1 jackfield for eight trunks
one DS/X3 jackfield for each HSS-2 shelf (required for T3/E3)
top cable entry kit
Note: The cabinet is not optional for nodes containing EXSs.
Table 6-6 Promina 800 Standard Shelf Configurations
Number of
Shelves
Allowed
Shelf Type
1 to 2 HSS-2, shelf 0 and x (where x =1 to 7) when operating additional PPMs or T3 cards
1 to 7 STS or EXS
1 to 6 STS or EXS with two HSS-2 shelves
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The T1 jackfield can be either an optional or standard component
depending on the type of shelf installed. The auxiliary fan and alarm
panel are always optional.

Shelf and Slot
Numbering
Shelf numbering is determined by the SX-2 spigot number (07)
connected to a particular shelf, not the physical position of the shelf in the
rack or cabinet. For example, a single HSS-2 shelf is always numbered 0.
For each shelf connected to a node, the available SX-2 spigots are
reduced by the number of T3s or E3s required. Starting with seven
spigots (spigot 0 is reserved for HSS-2), each T3/E3 reduces port
availability by one. The SX-2 spigots also are reduced by the number of
EXS/STS shelves attached. In addition, if two HSS-2s exist in a system,
then each HSS-2 requires one spigot. As a result, the number of available
spigots is reduced.
HSS-2, STS, and EXS shelf numbering details are shown in Table 6-8.

Table 6-7 T1 Jackfield Options
Shelf Types T1 Jackfield
1-2 EXSs T1 jackfield and auxiliary fan
(optional)
3-8 EXSs T1 jackfield included
1 STS T1 jackfield
1 STS Alarm panel (optional)
Table 6-8 HSS-2, STS, and EXS Shelf Numbering
Shelf Numbering for HSS-2 Shelf Numbering for STS or EXS
1 HSS-2 = numbered 0 Numbered 1 through 7, STSs or EXSs
2 HSS-2 = numbered 0, x (x=1-7) Numbered 2 through 7, STSs or EXSs
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 17
The HSS-2 contains 16 card slots; the STS contains 12 card slots.
Although the STS chassis has only 12 slots, four extra slots are kept as
placeholders, thereby preserving the Promina slot numbering scheme.
This slot numbering scheme creates a uniform slot numbering range that
is independent of the actual shelf type (whether HSS-2, EXS, or STS).
Figure 6-7 Slot Numbering
For example, even though there are 16 slots for the HSS-2 shelf, the slot
numbers are the same for the STS as they are for the HSS-2. Also, the
first slot number for each shelf in the STS is the same as in the
corresponding shelf in the EXS even though each STS has only 12 actual
slots and each EXS has 16 slots.
Slot Restrictions
Slots are restricted in a Promina 800 as follows:
In the HSS-2, for a system with three or fewer shelves, the SX-2 must
be installed in slot 0 and 15; with four or more shelves, a pair of
SX-2s also must reside in slot 1 and 14 (see Figure 6-4). Unused
restricted slots can be used for other cards such as E3, T3, or PPMs.
In the STS, the BXs must reside in the leftmost slots.
In the EXS, the BXs must reside in the rightmost slots.
L
D
C
E
L
P
Q
A
S
D
P
S
M
T
R
K
2
H
S
D
2
B
X
B
X
PS
PS
S
X
2
T
3
P
M
P
P
S
X
2
P
R
C
I
S
D
N
X
T
R
K
2
P
R
C
PS
PS
H
S
D
2
H
S
S
S
T
S
P
-
2
0
1
5
1
6
3
1
M
Q
A
S
D
Q
A
S
D
L
D
C
E
L
P
T
R
K
2
I
S
D
N
X
Q
A
S
D
P
S
M
T
R
K
2
P
R
C
H
S
D
2
H
S
D
2
B
X
B
X
PS
PS
S
X
2
T
3
P
P
M
P
P
M
S
X
2
H
S
S
E
X
S
-
2
1
6
3
1
1
5 0
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
HSS-2 Shelf The Promina 800 HSS-2 shelf is a 16-slot chassis that contains:
a backplane
power supplies, PDUs, and fans
standard equipment modules such as PPMs and SX-2s
feature modules such as T3s and E3s
HSS-2 Shelf Door
A self-retaining quick release Phillips screw locks the HSS-2 shelf front
door in place. Unlock the door by turning the screw 90 degrees
counterclockwise. Lift up and remove the front door from the hinges.
Figure 6-8 displays the location of the screw access hole.
Figure 6-8 HSS-2 Front Door Removal
Promina
Access Hole
Power Supply
Status LEDS
and Retaining Screw
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 19
Figure 6-9 shows the Promina 800 HSS-2 shelf front view.
Figure 6-9 HSS-2 Shelf (Front View)
HSS-2 Backplane
The HSS-2 backplane provides 16 slot connections for 16 front cards.
The backplane bottom connector provides a connection to the front card;
the top connector provides hot insertion for the front card hot insertion
pins. The center connectors on the front and rear interface cards connect
through the opening in the backplane as shown in Figure 6-10.
Air Space
HSS-0
PPM Cards
SX-2 Cards
SX-2 Cards
BX Cards
Trunk Card
PSM Card
EXS 2
EXS 3
Alarm Panel (optional) / Fan
Power Supplies
Power Supplies
T1-jackfield (optional) /Fans
Voice Card
Power Supply Tray
EXS 1
~ ~
T3-jackfield (optional)
Air Space
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-10 HSS-2 Backplane, Front, and Interface Card Connections
The rear interface card is secured to the chassis rear panel with screws at
the top and bottom. These provide stability for connection with the front
card (Figure 6-11).
Figure 6-11 HSS-2 Shelf and Backplane (Rear View)
Caution: To ensure proper grounding, the HSS shelf must be connected to
earth ground. A shelf-grounding stud is provided for this purpose. Connect a 14
AWG wire (minimum) between the grounding stud and facility earth ground, and
secure the wire with a nut and lockwasher.
Front Card
Hot Insertion
Power Pins
Top
Center
Connectors
Connector
Bottom
Connector
HSS-2
Backplane
Rear Card
Card Guides
Backplane
SBI Interface
Card
Rear Panel
Screws
Chassis
Grounding Stud
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 21
Caution: Be careful not to bend or damage the pins on the SX/SXI, PPM/PPMI,
and T3/T3I modules during insertion. When you exchange cards on a HSS-2
shelf, a mating problem can occure when inserting a SX-2, PPM, or T3 front
cards. To reduce the chance of damaging pins, loosen the two screws that
secure the rear interface card to the shelf. This allows the board connectors to
mate properly. After the front card is properly seated, tighten the screws on the
rear interface card.
Figure 6-12 shows a front card power pin connector for HSS-2 hot
insertion to the backplane connector. For hot insertion details, refer to the
appropriate feature module manual.
Figure 6-12 Card Hot Insertion Power Pins
Top Connector
Hot Insertion
Power Pins
Back Plane
Pre-powered Connector
(PPM, SX-2, T3,E3 only)
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 22 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
STS Shelf The Promina 800 STS shelf is a 12-slot chassis that contains:
a backplane
power supplies, PDUs, and fans
standard equipment modules
feature modules
a bus terminator card
STS Shelf Front Panel
The front of each STS shelf is equipped with a removable front panel.
Remove the front panel by loosening two retaining screws in the lower
half of the panel. Pull the lower portion of the panel slightly away and
down from the chassis. Figure 6-13 displays the location of the retaining
screws.
Figure 6-13 STS Front Panel Removal
Retaining Screw
Promina
Power Supplies
Status LEDs
Retaining Screw
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 23
Figure 6-14 shows a Promina 800 HSS-2 and STS combination.
Figure 6-14 Rack-mounted HSS-2 and STS Promina 800 (Front/side View)
Removable
Front Door
Removable
Front Panel
T1 Jackfield
(optional)
Telco Rack
(optional)
HSS
STS
Power Supplies
Plenum
Alarm Panel
(optional)
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 24 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-15 shows a rear view of a cabinet containing a Promina 800 with
one HSS-2 and three EXSs.
Figure 6-15 Typical Promina 800 (Rear View)
Front Door
Rear
Door
EXS (Shelf 3)
Power Supplies
EXS (Shelf 1)
Power Distribution Unit
T3 Jackfield (optional)
HSS-2 (Shelf 0)
EXS (Shelf 2)
Power Supplies
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 25
STS Backplane
The front and rear interface cards plug directly into the backplane
(Figure 6-16). This completes the connection between the front and rear
interface cards.
Figure 6-16 STS Backplane, Front, and Rear Card Connections
STS Shelf
Rear
Card
Interface
Front Card
Backplane
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 26 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Setting the STS Backplane Jumper
Verify that the backplane jumper strap setting on each STS is set to
Shelf 0 (Figure 6-17). The jumper strap settings are bit representations of
the shelf number.
Note: All jumpers are factory-set to the Shelf 0 position.
Figure 6-17 Promina 800 STS Backplane Jumper Setting (Rear View)
Caution: To ensure proper grounding, the HSS shelf must be connected to
earth ground. A shelf-grounding stud is provided for this purpose. Connect a 14
AWG wire (minimum) between the grounding stud and facility earth ground, and
secure the wire with a nut and lockwasher.
Shelf 0
Grounding Stud
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 27
EXS Shelf The Promina 800 EXS shelf is a 16-slot chassis which is only mounted in
an net.com cabinet (Figure 6-18).
Figure 6-18 EXS with standard equipment and Feature Modules
Caution: A separate fan assembly is required for every one to two EXS shelves.
EXS Backplane
The EXS front and rear interface cards plug directly into the backplane
card cage (Figure 6-19). This completes the connection between the front
and rear interface cards.
Air Space
HSS-0
PPM Cards
SX-2 Cards
SX-2 Cards
Trunk Card
PSM Card
EXS 2
EXS 3
Alarm Panel (optional)/Fan
Power Supplies
Power Supplies
T1-jackfield (optional)/Fans
Voice Card
Power Supply Tray
EXS 1
T3-jackfield (optional)
Air Space
BX Cards
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 28 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-19 EXS Backplane
Setting the EXS Backplane Jumper
Verify that the backplane jumper strap setting on each EXS is set to
Shelf 0 (Figure 6-20). The jumper strap settings are bit representations of
the shelf number.
Note: All jumpers are factory-set to the Shelf 0 position.
Figure 6-20 Promina 800 EXS Backplane Jumper Setting (Rear View)
EXS Rear
Card
Interface
Front Card
Backplane
Shelf 0
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 29
Power Supplies
Four different power supplies are used in the Promina 800 system:
400 W AC/DC
400 W DC/DC
250 W AC/DC
250 W DC/DC
The 400 W power supplies provide power to the EXS shelves; the 250 W
power supplies provide power to the HSS-2 and STS shelves. For detailed
information regarding power supplies, refer to the Promina System
Components chapter in this manual.
System Power and
BTU Output
For Promina 800 system power and thermal output details, refer to System
Wattage and BTU Output in the Chapter 7, Promina System Components
in this manual.
For Promina 800 module power consumption details, refer to the Chapter
7, Promina System Components in this manual.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 30 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Power Distribution Units
Power distribution units (PDU) distributes input power to the power
supplies in the node or to power supplies on its own shelf. The following
section describes the PDUs for the cabinet, rack, and the HSS-2 and STS
shelves.
Cabinet/Rack
Mounted PDUs
The following PDUs are available and installed in an net.com cabinet or
rack:
-48 and -60 V DC dual feed (vertical mount)
-48 and -60 V DC dual feed (horizontal mount)
100 to 240 V AC dual feed (vertical mount)
100 to 240 V AC dual feed (horizontal mount)
-48 and -60 V DC PDU
The DC PDUs have the following features:
-48 and -60 V DC nominal input voltages [-60 V DC meets the
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) DC input
voltage requirements].
Individual power supplies can be replaced without bringing down the
node.
It provides for redundant input power.
It provides auxilary direct DC output power .
It can be configured for single or dual feed power.
The DC PDU, which has two recessed circuit breakers, supports two
separate input power groups: A and B. Each group is supported by its
own 60 A DC feed circuit.
The PDU has a total of 10 DC outlets, five outlets per power group. The
DC outlets powered by DC feed A are separated from those connected to
DC feed B. As a result, if either circuit is opened at the switch, only the
power supplies connected to that circuit lose their input power.
Note: When you replace a power supply, use the switches to disconnect input
power to that power supply.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 31
One of the five outlets in each power group provides auxilary power.
Each AUX outlet is protected by a 2 A fuse mounted in a fuse holder.
Warning: To protect against fire hazard, replace fuses with the same type and
rating as the original installed fuses. Disconnect power to the Aux Power load
prior to replacing fuses.
Figure 6-21 shows a detailed illustration of the vertical mount DC PDU.
Figure 6-21 DC PDU (Vertical Mount, Top View)
Warning: This unit has more than one power source. Disconnect both power
sources before servicing.
J1
2A, 250V
FEED B
J2 J3
J4 J5
J7 J8 J9
J11 J12
FEED A
F1 F2
Feed B
Circuit
Breaker
Feed A
Circuit
Breaker
AUX Power
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 32 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-22 shows an illustration of the horizontal mount DC PDU. Input
power is provided through the DC input power receptable mounted on the
cabinet left rear mounting rail (as viewed from the rear of the cabinet).
Figure 6-22 DC PDU (Horizontal Mount, Rear View)
Caution: Ensure that the DC power plug is securely plugged into the receptacle
and secured with the latching lever. The latching lever should be located on the
left side behind the rear door hinge (as viewed from the rear of the cabinet).
Input Power Receptacle
Aux Power
1
2
3
4
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 33
Figure 6-23 shows how DC input power is distributed between the
vertical mount DC power distribution unit and the power supply trays in a
Promina 800 two cabinet configuration.
Figure 6-23 DC Input Power Distribution Vertical Mount (Rear View)
J1

J2 J3
J4 J5
J7 J8 J9
J11 J12 F1 F2
Bottom Power Supply Tray
Top Power
AuxPower
CB1 CB2
Supply Tray
FEED B FEED A
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 34 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-24 shows how DC input power is distributed between the
horizontal mount DC power distribution unit and the power supply trays
in a Promina 800.
Figure 6-24 DC Input Power Distribution Horizontal Mount (Rear View)
A B
DC Cabinet PDU
Aux Power Tray
Top Power
Supply Tray
Bottom Power Supply Tray
One cabinet configuration
Two cabinet configuration
A 3 A 2 B 2 B 3
A 1 A 4 B 4 B 1
To HSS Power
Supply 1 or B4
To HSS Power
Supply 2 or A4
in a two cabinet
configuration
in a two cabinet
configuration
J9 J6 J5 J3 J4
J1 J2
J7 J8 J10
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 35
Figure 6-25 shows how DC output power is distributed from the power
supplies to shelves and fan trays.
Figure 6-25 DC Output Power Distribution for Promina 800 (Rear View)
Connection to DC Power Source
Input power is connected to the terminal block located in the PDUs
connection compartment behind an access cover on the PDU. This
connection requires 6 AWG or 8 AWG copper wire.
Jumpers on the terminal block are factory set for single feed. Pull out both
jumpers to establish dual feed (Figure 6-26).
Warning: A licensed electrician must install the external source wiring.
DC Connectors
DC Connector
DC Connector
Optional Fan Tray
Top Power
Supply Tray
Unused
Pigtails
Bottom Power
Supply Tray
Intake Fan Assembly
Jackfield
Unused
Pigtails
DC Connectors
DC Connector
DC Connector
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 36 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-26 Connection Compartment
Figure 6-27 shows how a flathead screwdriver is inserted into each
service opening of the terminal block to install the external source wiring.
Figure 6-27 Installation of External Source Wiring
Feed B (+)
Feed B (-)
Feed A (+)
Feed A (-)
1
2
3
4
Jumpers
Terminal Block
Chassis
Ground Stud
Chassis
Ground Stud
Conduit Knockouts
Connection to DC Sources
Customer wiring System wiring
Side View
Wire
Screwdriver
Service opening
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 37
Figure 6-28 illustrates the customer input power wiring terminals for the
DC plug.
Warning: A licensed electrician must perform the connection to the DC power
source.
Figure 6-28 DC Input Power Plug for the PDU-Horizontal Mount
Caution: Ensure that the DC power plug is securely plugged into the receptacle
and secured with the latching lever. The latching lever should be located on the
left side behind the rear door hinge (as viewed from the rear of the cabinet).
1
3
4
2
Jumpers
Jumpers
Wires
Black Red
(-48 V DC)
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 38 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
100 to 240 V AC PDU
The AC PDUs supports the following:
50/60 Hertz, 100 to 240 V AC nominal voltage range
input power redundancy with dual input power feeds (input feed
cross-connects do not apply)
replacement of individual power supplies without bringing down a
node
two AC output connectors to the Aux power supply tray
two spare AC output connectors
The AC PDUs, which has two recessed circuit breakers, supports two
separate input power groups: A and B. Each group is supported by its
own 20 A AC feed circuit.
Note: When you replace a power supply, use the switches to disconnect input
power to that power supply.
The vertical mount AC PDU has a total of 12 AC outlets, six outlets per
power group (Figure 6-29). The AC outlets powered by feed A are
separate from those connected to feed B. As a result, if either circuit is
opened at the switch, only the power supplies connected to that circuit
lose their input power.
Any one of the six outlets in each power group may be dedicated to the
power supply in the DC tray.
Note: net.com manufacturing utilizes outlets J3 and J7 for the Aux power
supply input (Figure 6-29).
Figure 6-29 AC PDU-Vertical Mount (Top View)
J1 J2 J3 J7 J8 J9
J4 J5 J6 J10 J11 J12
CB2 CB1
Group B Group A
Aux Power
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 39
The horizontal mount AC PDU has a total of 10 AC outlets, five outlets
per power group (Figure 6-30). The AC outlets powered by feed A are
separate from those connected to feed B. As a result, if either circuit is
opened at the switch, only the power supplies connected to that circuit
lose their input power.
Any one of the five outlets in each power group may be dedicated to the
power supply in the Aux power tray.
Note: net.com manufacturing utilizes outlets J5 and J6 for the Aux power
supply input (Figure 6-30).
Figure 6-30 AC PDU-Horizontal Mount (Rear View)
Warning: These units has more than one power source. Disconnect both power
sources before servicing.
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10
AUX Power
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 40 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-31 shows how AC input power is distributed between the AC
power distribution unit (vertical mount) and power supply trays in a
Promina 800 two cabinet configuration.
Figure 6-31 AC Input Power Distribution Vertical Mount (Rear View)
J6
CB2
CB1
A B
AC Cabinet PDU
Aux Tray
Top Power
Supply Tray
Bottom Power Supply Tray
J1 J2 J3
J12
J10
J11
J9 J8
J4 J5
J7
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 41
Figure 6-32 shows how AC input power is distributed between the AC
power distribution unit (horizontal mount) and power supply trays in a
Promina 800.
Figure 6-32 AC Input Power Distribution Horizontal Mount (Rear View)
A B
AC Cabinet PDU
Aux Tray
Top Power
Supply Tray
Bottom Power Supply Tray
J
2
J
3
J
4
J
5
J
6
One cabinet configuration
Two cabinet configuration
A 3 A 2 B 2 B 3
A 1 A 4 B 4 B 1
To HSS Power
Supply 1 or B4
To HSS Power
Supply 2 or A4
in a two cabinet
configuration
in a two cabinet
configuration
J
7
J
9
J
1
0
J
1
J
8
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 42 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
HSS-2 PDUs Each HSS-2 power distribution unit (PDU) distributes input power to the
power supplies on its own shelf. Two types of HSS-2 PDUs are integral
to the HSS-2 shelf:
-48 and -60 V DC, dual feed (nominal voltages)
100 to 240 V AC, dual feed (nominal voltages)
Note: For true redundancy, each PDU input must be connected to an
independent power feed.
-48 and -60 V DC PDU (dual feed)
The -48 and -60 V DC PDU is located at the rear of the HSS-2 and is
vertically mounted at the leftmost side of the shelf (viewed from the rear).
Figure 6-33 shows a -48 and -60 V DC PDU.
Figure 6-33 HSS-2 -48 and -60 V DC PDU
BOT
P/S 1
OFF OFF
INPUT
A B
TOP
P/S 2
Power Supply
Power Supply
Circuit Breaker 1
Circuit Breaker 2
Main PDU
Power Input
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 43
Power is supplied to Inputs A and B of this PDU through two cables from
the main PDU located at the bottom of either the cabinet or the Telco
rack. The HSS-2 PDU has two 10-A circuit breaker/switches:
Switch 1 provides power to the P/S-1 (lower power supply).
Switch 2 provides power to the P/S-2 (upper power supply).
The circuit breaker/switches are used to disconnect power when a power
supply is replaced.
Warning: This unit has more than one power supply cord. Disconnect both
power supply cords before servicing.
100 to 240 V AC PDU (Dual Feed)
The HSS-2 100 to 240 V AC PDU is vertically mounted at the rear
leftmost side of the HSS-2 (viewed from the rear). The AC PDU has two
6.3 A fuses mounted inside the power entry modules (Figure 6-34).
Figure 6-34 HSS-2 100 to 240 V AC PDU
Warning: To protect against fire hazard, replace fuses with the same type and
rating as the original installed fuses. Disconnect power prior to replacing fuses.
TOP
P/S-2
TTOM
P/S-1
BO
Power Supply
Switch 2
Power Supply
Switch 1
Main PDU
Power Receptacle
Main PDU
Power Receptacle
Fuse Drawer
Fuse Drawer
Warning Label
Power Entry
Module
Power Entry
Module
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 44 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The receptacles below the power switches accept input power cables for
distributing power to each power supply. Switches 1 and 2 control power
to each of the power supplies.
Warning: This unit has more than one power supply cord. Disconnect both
power supply cords before servicing.
STS PDUs The STS PDUs are mounted horizontally in the STS. There are two types
of PDUs available:
-48 and -60 V DC single/dual feed
100 to 240 V AC dual feed
-48 and -60 V DC Single/Dual Feed PDU
The STS -48 and -60 V DC single/dual feed PDU is located at the bottom
rear of the shelf. The -48 and -60 V DC PDU has the following features
(Figure 6-35):
-48 V DC and -60 V DC nominal input voltages [-60 V DC nominal
meets European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
standards].
Individual power supplies can be replaced without bringing down the
node.
It provides redundant input power with dual DC taps within a DC
input voltage conduit.
It provides DC output connectors that supply Aux power from the
input source.
It contains internal fans with 24 V DC.
It can be configured for single and dual feed.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 45
Figure 6-35 STS -48 and -60 V DC PDU
The -48 and -60 V DC PDU has two circuit breakers (Figure 6-35) on the
front panel labeled:
P/S-Topcontrols power to the top power supply and output A of the
Aux output connectors
P/S-Bottomcontrols power to the bottom power supply and output
B of the Aux output connectors
Use the circuit breaker to disconnect input power before replacing the
power supply. This DC PDU also has two 2 A fuses and two connectors
for AUX power. The fuses are located below the Aux output connectors.
Warning: To protect against fire hazard, replace fuses with the same type and
rating as the original installed fuses. Disconnect power to the Aux power load
prior to replacing fuses.
O
N
O
N
P/S TOP
P/S BOTT
OUTPUT
B A
F2 F1
DC INPUT
Aux Output
Connectors
Power Supply
Circuit Breakers
Aux Power Fuses Junction Box
Shroud
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 46 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Connection to DC Power Source
DC power is usually supplied to the STS shelf from a semi-rigid conduit
carrying a minimum of two, 12-14 AWG power conductors. Facilities
with primary and backup power circuits have four conductors (six, if up
to two optional ground wires are provided) in the conduit (A and B feed).
The conduit is attached to the DC PDU junction box. Power conductors
are attached to the terminal block located behind the DC PDU junction
box cover (Figure 6-35). The chassis ground wire, if provided, is attached
to the chassis stud inside the junction box.
Note: A licensed electrician must perform the connection to the DC power
source. Use only copper conductors 12-14 AWG.
The terminal block is factory-set for a single feed circuit using removable
jumpers (Figure 6-36).
Figure 6-36 Connection Compartment
Terminal
Customer Installed
Single Feed
Wiring Side
Jumpers
Block
Ground Stud
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 47
Figure 6-37 illustrates the proper connection of a single feed circuit and
the position of the terminal block jumpers.
Figure 6-37 Single Feed DC PDU Power & Chassis Ground Connection
Caution: To ensure proper grounding, make certain the STS shelf is securely
connected to facility earth ground. A system ground stud (threaded) is located
adjacent to the DC power terminal block for this purpose (Figure 6-37). A nut and
lockwasher is used to secure the 14 AWG wire (minimum) connection between
the ground stud and facility earth ground.
Figure 6-38 shows the proper connection for a dual feed circuit. For dual
feed operation, remove the jumpers.
Warning: This PDU has more than one feed. Disconnect both feeds before
servicing.
Single Feed Jumpers
(Remove For Dual Feed)
Return Feed A
-48/-60 VDC Feed A
Conduit Feed A
Customer Installed Wiring
Return
-48/-60 VDC
Chassis
Ground Stud
Factory Installed Wiring To PDU
+ +
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 48 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-38 Dual Feed DC PDU Power & Chassis Ground Connection
Figure 6-39 shows a flathead screwdriver inserted into the terminal block
service opening to install the external source wiring.
Figure 6-39 Installation of External Source Wiring
Caution: To release the wiring, insert a flathead screwdriver blade into the slot
and turn it slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. Pulling on the screwdriver
blade while turning can damage the terminal block.
Return Feed A
-48/-60 VDC Feed A
Conduit Feed A
Customer Installed Wiring
Return
-48/-60 VDC
Chassis
Ground Stud
Factory Installed Wiring To PDU
Return Feed B
Conduit Feed B
-48/-60 VDC Feed B
+ +
Side View
External Source Wiring
Factory Installed Wiring to PDU
Screwdriver
Top View
Insert
External
Wire
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 49
100 to 240 V AC PDU
The STS 100 to 240 V AC PDU is located at the bottom rear of the shelf.
The AC PDU supports the following:
50/60 Hertz, 100 V AC to 240 V AC nominal input voltage
input power redundancy through dual input power feeds (input feeds
cross-connect does not apply)
detachable country-specific power cord(s)
power supply replacement without bringing down a node
two AC output connectors to support the Aux power supplies
Figure 6-40 shows a detailed illustration of the AC PDU installed in an
STS shelf. This unit has two input power cord connectors, two circuit
breakers, and two AC output connectors providing power to the Aux
power supplies. Use the circuit breaker to disconnect input power to the
power supply being replaced.
Figure 6-40 STS 100 to 240 V AC PDU

Warning: This PDU has more than one feed. Disconnect both feeds before
servicing.
Power Distribution Unit
P/S TOP P/S BOTT OUTPUT
B A
INPUT B INPUT A
0 11
Ground Stud
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 50 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Fan Tray Assemblies
There are three types of fan tray assemblies that can be installed in a
Promina 800:
alarm panel/auxiliary
jackfield
intake
The number of fan tray assemblies required depends on the number of
EXS shelves.
Alarm
Panel/Auxiliary
Fan Assembly
The optional alarm panel/auxiliary fan assembly (Figure 6-41) resides
inside the alarm panel assembly and contains four DC powered fans. The
auxiliary fan assembly is required on all Promina 800 EXSs.
The Promina 800 system supports an optional alarm panel and an external
-48V DC Aux power supply.
Figure 6-41 Fan Mounted in Alarm Panel Assembly
Fan Tray
Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Alarm
Redundant
Power Supply
Alarm Panel
Mounting
Bracket
DC Power
Output Harness
Rear
AC Power Input
Receptacles
Panel
Assembly
Tray
Alarm Front Panel
Fan Receptacles
Mesh
Screen
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 51
Jackfield Fan
Assembly
The optional jackfield fan assembly (Figure 6-42) resides inside the
jackfield assembly and contains two DC powered fans. The jackfield fan
assembly is required on all Promina 800 EXSs.
Figure 6-42 Jackfield Fan Assembly
Intake Fan
Assembly
The optional intake fan assembly (Figure 6-43) resides at the bottom of
the cabinet and contains two DC powered fans. The intake fan assembly
is required on all four-shelf Promina 800 EXSs.
Figure 6-43 Intake Fan Assembly
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 52 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Thermostatic
Controlled Fan
Assembly
The optional fan assembly (Figure 6-44) contains four thermostatically
controlled DC powered fans. The fans operate at 100% RPM for
temperatures above 40
o
C and 50% RPM for temperatures below 40
o
C.
The fan assembly is required on all four-shelf Promina 800 EXSs.
Figure 6-44 Thermostatic Controlled Fan Assembly
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 53
Standard Equipment Modules
Modules consist of a front and rear interface card. Front cards contain the
module logic and processing associated with the specific function of the
module. Rear interface cards provide the physical connection to customer
equipment. The front and rear interface cards are connected to each other
through the shelf backplane.
standard equipment modules provide:
software processing
memory storage
time-slot management
power and alarm reporting
synchronization
Table 6-9 Promina 800 standard equipment Modules
Shelf Type standard equipment Modules Interfaces
HSS-2 Promina Processor Module (PPM) PPMI
Switching Exchange (SX-2) SXI-2
Shelf Bus Interface (SBI)
STS Bus Extender (BX) BXI
Bus Terminator End
Promina Server Module (PSM) PSMI
EXS Bus Extender (BX) BXI
Promina Server Module (PSM) PSMI
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 54 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
HSS-2 Shelf
Modules
The standard equipment modules and their related interfaces residing in
the HSS-2 shelf are described in Table 6-10.
There is an SBI-2 A card for domain A, and an SBI-2 B card for domain
B. The SBI-2s are located at the rear of the chassis positioned one above
the other, with the designations B at the top and A at the bottom. These
cards are cabled to a port on an SXI-2 card (Figure 6-45). For module
installation instructions, refer to the appropriate module manual.
Table 6-10 HSS-2 Shelf standard equipment Modules
Front Card Description
Rear Interface
Card
Description
PPM Controls node processing
functions
PPMI Interfaces with the PPM, and
allows connections with
external equipment and the
alarm panel
Switching
Exchange
(SX-2)
Provides node switching
matrix and clocking
Switching
Exchange Interface
(SXI-2)
Interfaces with the SX-2 and
HSS-2, STS, EXS shelves and
T3,E3, and ATMI modules
Shelf Bus Interface
(SBI-2)
Acts as the interface between
the SX-2 and HSS-2s
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 55
Reserved Card
Slots
Table 6-11 lists the shelf card slots reserved for the SX-2 and BX cards.
Figure 6-45 shows the SBI-2 and SXI-2 connections on an HSS-2. SBI-2s
are installed only on the HSS-2 shelf.
Figure 6-45 SBI-2 and SXI-2 Connections (Rear View)
Note: The SBI-2 does not require a front card. HSS-2 shelf cards are not
interchangeable with the STS or EXS shelf cards because of physical size
differences in the cards and backplanes. HSS-2 shelf cards are narrower than
EXS or STS shelf cards.
Table 6-11 Reserved Card Slots
Shelf Modules Restricted Slots
HSS-2 SX-2 0, 1, 14, 15
EXS BX Rightmost slots on the shelf
STS BX Leftmost slots on the shelf
Ports on
the SXI-2 cards
can be used
for T3, STS,
and EXS
connections.
Domain B
Top and
bottom
attaching
interface
cards
screws for
Grounding Stud
A Domain
SXI-2 SXI-2 T3I
SBI-2 SXI-2 SXI-2
15 0
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 56 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure 6-46 shows the PPM and SX-2 modules installed in an HSS-2
shelf.
Figure 6-46 HSS-2 Shelf standard equipment Modules (Front View)
Note: Each SXI-2 has seven available ports (port 0 is reserved for the HSS-2).
For every T3 or E3 installed, the available SXI-2 ports are reduced by one.
System
Redundancy
The Promina 800 provides system redundancy through two domains
designated A and B. Each domain is a combination of the BX and SX-2
cards, and the T3/E3 trunks.
If a T3, E3, or SX-2 in Domain A is taken out of service, then all Domain
A modules are out-of-service and all active modules switch to Domain B.
Figure 6-47 provides a view of a basic two-shelf Promina 800 hardware
configuration.
S
X
b
PPM SX-2
S
X
b
SX-2
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 57
Figure 6-47 Promina Basic Redundant Hardware Configuration
On the Promina 800, all shelves and T3/E3 modules are connected to
Domain A and Domain B (SBI-2 port A and B); however, only one
domain is active at a time. T3/E3 modules that are not configured in a
redundant pair can be connected to both sides of the switch and can
function for both domain A and B T3/E3s.
Promina Processor Module
The HSS-2 shelf includes a number of Promina Processor Modules
(PPM). Each PPM includes the following:
an MC68LC060 microprocessor
expandable memory resources
one IEEE 802.3 compliant Ethernet port for intranodal
communication
one serial port (console port)
one net.com proprietary DB 26-pin alarm interface connector for an
alarm panel connection
0 1
Power
Supply
2 3 14 15
STS Shelf
BX BX T
R
K
2
P
Q
A
S
D
16 17
H
S
D
-2
T3
HSS-2 Shelf
P
M
P
P
M
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
P
S
M
20 21 22
(front view)
(front view)
SX-2 SX-2 SX-2SX-2
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 58 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina Server Module
The STS or EXS shelf includes one to two Promina Server Modules
(PSM). Each PSM includes:
an MC68EC040 microprocessor
on-board mass storage disk drive
expandable memory resources
two IEEE 802.3 compliant Ethernet ports (internal and external
support)
two serial ports (service modem, terminal connectivity)
For details on the PSM, refer to the PSM section in this manual.
STS Shelf Modules The STS standard equipment modules are:
Bus Extender module (BX)allows the STS shelves to communicate
with other shelves. Its primary function is the serial/parallel
conversion of TBus and PBus information.
Bus Terminator card provides termination for the bus.
Promina Server Module.
Figure 6-48 shows the STS shelf standard equipment modules.
For module installation instructions, Appendix A, Card Installation.
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 6 - 59
STS Feature Modules
Feature modules are added to provide additional applications for each
private network. Feature modules include the following:
Figure 6-48 shows the trunk, voice, server, and data modules installed in
an STS shelf. For details on feature modules, refer to the applicable
feature module manual. For feature module installation instructions, refer
to the appropriate module manual.
Figure 6-48 STS standard equipment and Feature Modules
Refer to the Chapter 7, Promina System Components chapter for power
supply specifications. The STS requires the same power supplies as the
HSS-2.
Trunk Controls the flow of information over the trunks and
connection to other nodes.
Voice and voice
server
Manages the interface between voice communication
equipment, the Promina 800, and server modules;
decreases the trunking bandwidth for voice calls by
compression or companding conversion.
PX Provides packet-switching services over a wide-area
network and serves as the engine that drives the net.com
packet-over-circuit architecture.
Data Manages the interface between synchronous data services
and the Promina 800.
S
X
b
Trunk Voice PX-3 Data BX PSM
Promina 800 System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 - 60 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
EXS Shelf
Modules
The EXS is functionally equivalent to the STS (Figure 6-49). The EXS
supports all the standard equipment and feature modules as the STS shelf
except the SBI-2, which does not require the EXS. For details on feature
modules, refer to the applicable feature module manual. For feature
module installation instructions, refer to the appropriate module manual.
Note: The EXS power supplies (two per shelf for a redundant configuration)
reside in a separate power supply chassis.
Figure 6-49 EXS standard equipment and Feature Modules
Trunk Voice PX-3 Data BX PSM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 7
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 1
7Pr omi na Syst em
Component s
The Promina hardware components are described in the following
sections:
Power Supplies on page 7-2.
Wattage and BTU Output on page 7-12.
Module Power Consumption on page 7-13.
Load Units on page 7-17.
Logical Slots on page 7-18.
Minimum Load Board on page 7-21.
T1 Jackfield on page 7-24.
Alarm Panel Assembly on page 7-25.
Front Alarm Panel-2 on page 7-26.
Serial Port Interface on page 7-28.
Determining Bandwidth on page 7-32.
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Power Supplies
Table 7-1 lists all the power supplies types that are available for the
Promina systems. Power supplies installed are dependent on the shelf
type.
250 W Power
Supplies
A single 250 W AC/DC or 250 W DC/DC power supply supports one
card shelf in a nonredundant system. A second power supply in a
redundant system shares the load and provides additional reliability. The
power supplies are mounted on the right side, one above the other
(viewed from the front).
Caution: A failed power supply must be replaced with an identical power
supply. Power supplies in a redundant configuration must be the same part
number and revision level. Refer to Table 7-2 for 250 W part numbers.
The 250 W AC/DC and 250 W DC/DC power supplies have the
following features:
over current shut down
two status LEDs
easy replacement (in a redundant system) without bringing down the
node
The 250 W AC/DC power supply is available with Power Factor
Correction (PFC) or without PFC. Refer to Table 7-2.
Table 7-1 Promina System Power Supplies
Promina
System/Shelf
Output
Power
in
Watts
Type
Input Voltage
Range
Input
Connector
400, 800/HSS,STS 250 AC/DC 90 to 264 V AC IEC 320
400, 800/HSS,STS 250 DC/DC -40 to -72 V DC 3P M-N-L
800/EXS 400 AC/DC 90 to 264 V AC IEC320
800/EXS 400 DC/DC -40 to -72 V DC 3P Molex
200 Power Assembly
1
1. Power supplies are part of the Power Assembly. The entire Power Assembly is replaced
when a failure occurs.
265 AC/DC 90 to 264 V AC IEC 320
Aux Power Supply
2

2. Part of the Aux Power Supply Tray.
50 AC/DC 90 to 264 V AC IEC320
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 3
The 250 W AC/DC power supply supports autoranging AC input voltage
(90 to 264 V AC). The 250 W DC/DC power supply supports a wide DC
input voltage range of -40 to -72 V DC.
Caution: Damage can occur to a node if power supply specifications are
exceeded. A failed power supply must be replaced with an identical power
supply. Power supplies in a redundant configuration must be the same part
number and revision level. Refer to Table 7-2 for 250 W part numbers.

The 250 W AC/DC power supply is shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 250 W AC/DC Power Supply (Front and Rear View)
Table 7-2 Power Supplies250 W Part Numbers
Power Supply PFC Non-PFC
250 W AC/DC 027962 020577
250 W DC/DC 021925
029509
Front
AC Input Power
Connector
Rear
Input Power On LED
Fault LED
DC Output
Power Connector
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The 250 W DC/DC power supply is shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 250 W DC/DC Power Supply (Front and Rear View)
Caution: A failed power supply must be replaced with an identical power
supply. Power supplies in a redundant configuration must be the same part
number and revision level. Refer to Table 7-2 for 250 W part numbers.
The LED states for the 250 W AC/DC and 250 W DC/DC power supplies
are listed in Table 7-3.
Front
DC Input Power
Connector
Rear
Input Power On LED
Fault LED
DC Output
Power Connector
Table 7-3 Power Supply LED States (Redundant Configuration)
Operating Condition
Yellow LED
FAULT
Green LED
POWER ON
State
Normal Off On Running
DC outside limits
1
1. Under or over voltage beyond the voltage protection limits.
On On Running
Over voltage On On Latched off
Over current shut down On On Latched off
Over temperature On On Latched off
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 5
Maximum Output Currents
The maximum output currents for the 250 W power supplies are shown in
Table 7-4.
Power Supply Specifications
The specifications for the 250 W AC/DC and 250 W DC/DC power
supplies are listed in Table 7-5.
400 W Power
Supplies
The following 400 W power supplies are available:
400 W AC/DC
400 W DC/DC
The 400 W AC/DC power supply is available with Power Factor
Correction (PFC) or without PFC. Refer to Table 7-6.
Caution: A failed power supply must be replaced with an identical power
supply. Power supplies in a redundant configuration must be the same part
number and revision level. Refer to Table 7-6 for 400 W part numbers.
A single power supply can provide power to one EXS shelf in a
nonredundant configuration. In a redundant configuration, two power
Table 7-4 Maximum Output Currents for 250 W Power Supplies
Power Supply +5 V -5 V +12 V -12 V
250 W AC/DC
power supply
30.0 A 7.0 A 2.5 A 2.5 A
250W DC/DC
power supply
30.0 A 7.0 A 3.5 A 2.5 A
Table 7-5 250 W Power Supply Specifications
Input Voltage Range
90 to 264 V (AC)
-40 to -72 V (DC)
Frequency
47 to 63 Hz (AC)
Output Voltages
+5 V DC, -5 V DC, +12 V DC, -12 V DC
Cooling
Cooled by forced air
Regulatory Standards
(meets or exceeds)
UL 1950, EN60950
IEC 950
CSA-22.2 No. 950
FCC part 15, Class A
EN55022A, EN50082-1
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
supplies provide power to one EXS shelf. Each of the two power supplies
provide approximately one half of the card shelf power requirement.
Failure of one power supply does not affect the system. The redundant
power supply continues to deliver all the required power to the shelf.
The power supplies are mounted in the power supply tray in a Promina
net.com cabinet. The power supply tray can hold up to four power
supplies. The power supply has the following features:
over current shut down
two unit status LEDs
easy replacement (in a redundant system) without bringing down the
node
Note: The 400 W AC/DC power supply requires minimum load board usage.
The 400 W AC/DC supports autoranging AC input voltage (90 to 264 V
AC). The 400 W DC/DC power supply for the Promina system operates
in a telecommunication environment where a -40 to -72 V DC is the input
power source.
Caution: A failed power supply must be replaced with an identical power
supply. Power supplies in a redundant configuration must be the same part
number and revision level. Refer to Table 7-6 for 400 W part numbers.
Table 7-6 Power Supplies400 W Part Numbers
Power Supply PFC Non-PFC
400 W AC/DC 027961 021846
400 W DC/DC 021850
029508
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 7
The 400 W AC/DC power supply is illustrated in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 400 W AC/DC Power Supply (Front and Rear View)
The DC output power connector on the back of the power supply
connects the power supply to the backplane on the appropriate shelf. An
input power connector connects the power supply to the PDU.
Front
Rear
AC Input
Connector
Power
DC Output
Power
Fault LED
Power On LED
+5v
GND
-5v
+12v
-12v
Connector
Test Points
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
The 400 W DC/DC power supply is illustrated in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 400 W DC/DC Power Supply (Front and Rear View)
The LED states for the 400 W AC/DC and 400 W DC/DC power supplies
are shown in Table 7-7.
Front
Rear
DC Input
Connector
Power
DC Output
Power
Fault LED
Power On LED
+5v
GND
-5v
+12v
-12v
Connector
Test Points
Table 7-7 Power Supply LED States (Redundant Configuration)
Operating Condition
Yellow LED
FAULT
Green LED
Power On
State
Normal Off On Running
DC outside limits
1
1. Under or over voltage beyond the voltage protection limits.
On On Running
Over voltage On On Latched off
Over current shut down On Off Latched off
Over temperature On On Latched off
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 9
Maximum Output Currents
The maximum output currents for the 400 W power supplies are listed in
Table 7-8.
Power Supply Specifications
The specifications for the 400 W AC/DC and 400 W DC/DC power
supplies are listed in Table 7-9.
Table 7-8 Maximum Output Currents for 400 W Power Supplies
Power Supply +5 V -5V +12 V -12 V
400 W AC/DC or
400 W DC/DC
50.0 A 11.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A
Table 7-9 Power Supply Specifications
Input voltage range
90 to 264 V AC
-40 to -72 V DC
Frequency
47 to 63 Hz (AC)
Output voltages
+5 V DC, -5 V DC, +12 V DC, -12 V DC
Cooling
Cooled by forced air
Regulatory standards
(meets or exceeds)
UL 1950
EN60 950
EN 41003
CSA 234 (950-M90)
FCC part 15
EN50081-1
EN50082-1
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Aux Power Supply Tray
The Aux supply tray can be mounted to an alarm panel, empty frame, or
auxiliary fan assembly. The Aux power supply tray contains the Aux
power supplies (up to two) and related hardware (Figure 7-5).
Figure 7-5 AuxPower Supply Tray and Alarm Panel
The optional Aux power connections consist of the DC output and the AC
input for the power supplies. The rear panel has an opening in the back if
the Aux power supply tray is not ordered. Figure 7-6 shows the Aux
power connections on the Rear Alarm Panel.
Figure 7-6 Rear Alarm Panel (Aux Connections)
Note: For the Promina 200, the external Aux power supply tray is not required
because the Promina 200 provides -48 V DC from its backplane.
Fan Tray
Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Alarm
Redundant
Power Supply
Alarm Panel
Mounting
Bracket
DC Power
Output Harness
Rear
AC Power Input
Receptacles
Panel
Assembly
Tray
Alarm Front Panel
Fan Receptacles
Mesh
Screen
P/S-1 P/S-2
DC AC
INPUT OUTPUT
P/S-2 P/S-1
Aux Power Connections
I
N
C
O
M
N
C
N
O
C
O
M
EXT ALM SUM ALM
CPU
3
4
Alarm Connectors
1
2
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 11
The Aux power supply tray is factory installed if one of the following is
purchased:
alarm panel
auxiliary fan
Fan Trays The available fan trays with DC powered fans are:
Optional fan tray (Figure 7-5). Resides inside the alarm panel
assembly and contains four fans. The connector for the optional fan
tray is located at the right side of the Rear Alarm Panel.
Jackfield fan tray. Resides in the T1 jackfield assembly and contains
two DC fans. This fan tray also can reside in an auxiliary fan tray in a
4- to 8-shelf Promina 800 EXS.
Intake fan assembly.
Thermostatic controlled fan assembly.
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Wattage and BTU Output
The Promina shelf types with their maximum wattage and BTUs per hour
are listed in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10 Wattage and BTU Output
Shelf Type
Maximum Input Power
Watts BTUs/Hour
EXS AC System 615 2100
DC System 645 2200
HSS-2 AC System 385 1315
DC System 400 1365
STS AC System 385 1315
DC System 400 1365
Promina 400 AC System 385 1315
DC System 400 1365
Promina 200 AC System 400 1392
Promina 100 AC System 214 730
DC System 150
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 13
Module Power Consumption
The module power consumption for the Promina systems are listed in
Table 7-11 to Table 7-15.

Table 7-11 standard equipment Module Power Consumption
standard
equipment Module
Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
BX Promina 800 BXI .67 .33 0 0 5.03
PPM (Promina 800) PPMI 2.7 .070 0 0 13.86
SX-2 (Promina 800) SXI-2 1.52 .54 0 0 10.35
SBI None .34 .06 0 0 2.01
PLM (Promina 400
and 200)
PLMI 2.0 .50 .10 .20 16.15
Bus terminator
(Promina 400)
None .41 .14 .039 0 3.23
PSM PSMI 2.1 0 0 .25 13.5
IPLM None 3.5 0.9 0.05 0.05 23.4
Table 7-12 Trunk Module Power Consumption (1 of 2)
Trunk Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
I422 TRK/I422 TRKX I422 TRK 2.03 .10 0 0 10.66
TRK-2A CEPT 1.83 .03 .006 0 9.38
BEZS 2.21 .03 .006 0 11.28
RS422 1.99 .10 0 0 10.46
NXTK 1.87 .03 0 0 9.50
EIA-530
/RS422
1.88 .10 0 0 9.91
TRK-3 T1-DSX 2.31 .07 0 0 11.91
E1 2.32 .07 0 0 11.96
EIA-530
(STI)
2.28 .07 0 0 11.76
V.35 (STI) 2.23 .16 0 0 11.97
T3 TRK T3I 2.84 .14 .06 .004 15.68
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance


E3 TRK E3I 2.06 .13 0 0 10.96
CellXpress (CX) CX Frontcard 3.72 .06 .06 0 20.14
CXI-T3 .64 .11 0 0 3.81
CXI-E3 .53 .01 0 0 2.77
CXI-T1 .53 .01 0 0 2.77
SA TRK SA-EIA530 2.52 .20 .034 0 14.03
Table 7-13 Server Module Power Consumption
Server Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
PrimeSwitch None 2.75 .03 .007 .004 14.04
PrimeVoice/6 None 2.12 .04 0 0 10.60
PrimeVoice/12 None 2.12 .04 0 0 10.60
PrimeVoice/24 None 4.05 .03 0 0 20.40
Table 7-14 Voice Module Power Consumption
Voice Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
PRC DS-1 2.57 .03 .01 0 13.12
PVA/C 4 W E&M 1.08 .03 .04 .014 6.20
TMCP Dual AMI 2.15 .03 0 0 10.90
Table 7-12 Trunk Module Power Consumption (2 of 2)
Trunk Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 15

Table 7-15 Data Module Power Consumption (1 of 2)
Data Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
DMD Quad RS232
DCE
1.30 .03 .105 .09 8.99
Quad RS232
DTE
1.27 .03 .06 .053 7.86
Quad RS530
DCE
2.83 .24 0 0 15.37
Quad V.54
DTE
1.43 .05 .09 .08 9.45
Quad V.35
DCE
1.83 .56 .074 .073 13.77
Quad V.35
DTE
1.65 .44 0 .008 10.59
HSD-2B Dual RS232
DCE
1.33 .06 .08 .08 8.88
Dual RS232
DTE
1.37 .06 .07 .06 8.72
Dual RS422
DCE
1.71 .10 0 0 9.06
Dual RS422
DTE
1.74 .10 0 0 9.21
EIA530 DCE 1.63 .07 0 0 8.51
Dual V.35
DCE
1.65 .37 .043 .038 11.11
Dual V.35
DTE
1.59 .27 .043 .04 10.32
QASD Quad RS232
DCE
.62 .03 .11 .101 5.79
Quad RS232
DTE
.62 .03 .069 .065 4.86
RS530 DCE 2.17 .24 0 0 2.07
Quad V.35
DCE
1.12 .56 .087 .089 10.57
Quad V.35
DTE
1.02 .44 0 .008 7.44
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
USD Dual RS232
DCE
2.16 .03 .073 .087 12.87
Dual RS232
DTE
2.12 .03 .066 .061 12.28
Dual RS422
DCE
2.46 .07 0 0 12.66
Dual RS422
DTE
2.52 .07 0 0 12.96
EIA530 DCE 1.72 .04 0 0 8.80
Biphase 2.34 .10 0 0 12.21
Dual V.35
DCE
2.44 .35 .042 .038 14.95
Dual V.35
DTE
2.32 .25 .043 .04 13.87
Table 7-15 Data Module Power Consumption (2 of 2)
Data Module Interface
Current Drain in Amps At:
Total W
+5.0 V
DC
-5.1V
DC
+12 V
DC
-12 V
DC
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 17
Load Units
Table 7-16 lists the modules using load units.

Table 7-16 Modules Using Load Units
Modules/Application Load Units
PPM, SSC port (8 maximum) 1/SSC port
PLM, SSC port (8 maximum) 1/SSC port
IPLM, SSC port (8 maximum) 1/SSC port
PSM 0
T3 trunk 8
E3 trunk 4
TRK-3 proprietary bundle 1/bundle
TRK-3 PRC/TMCP proprietary bundles 1/bundle
CellXpress CBR virtual trunk bundles 1/bundle
All other trunk modules 1
FRX 1
1
1. The PX-3 communicates with the Promina nodes when software
applications are downloaded from memory. As a precaution, assign one
load unit to the PX platform.
LWX 1
1
PrimeSwitch 1
1
PRC 2
TMCP 2
PVA/C 1
2
2. The PVA/C module requires one load unit for any number (up to six per
node) of PVA/C modules (1:N).
PX-3 1
1
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Logical Slots
The logical slot requirements for all Promina modules are shown in Table
7-17 to Table 7-21.
Note: Redundant modules use logical slots when they are online.
Table 7-17 Logical Slot Requirements for standard equipment Modules
standard equipment Modules Logical Slots
PPM (Promina 800) 1.0
SX-2 (Promina 800) 0.0
PSM (Promina 800, 400, and 200) 0.0
BX (Promina 800) 0.0
PLM (Promina 400 and 200) 0.25
IPLM (Promina 100) 0.25
Bus Extender (Promina 400) 0.0
Bus Terminator (Promina 400) 0.0
Table 7-18 Logical Slot Requirements for Trunk Modules
Trunk Modules Logical Slots
SA-TRK
1
1. Corresponding to maximum calls per SA-TRK: 127, 255, 511, 1023.
1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
T3 (Promina 800 only)
2
2. Each offline T3 uses three logical slots.
3.0
TRK-2/TRK-2X with the BEZS (T1), RS-422, CEPT,
and NXTK interface cards
1.0
TRK-3 span or tandem
3
3. Corresponding to maximum calls per TRK-3: 127, 160.
1.0, 2.0
TRK-3 tandem additional
4
4. Add 0.5 logical slots for each 16 DS0s (or fewer than) from Span. A card may
also require 3 logical slots if calls traverse both the Span and Tandem cards.
0.5, 1.0
E3 (Promina 800 only) 0.0
CBR/VBR port bundles
5
5. Logical slots always are assigned on a per port basis and vary depending on the
aggregate bandwidth of the CX ports.
0.125 to 2 per port
CBR virtual trunk bundle
6
6. Multiple bundles may share the same CBR port when the aggregate speed of the
bundles does not exceed the port speed.
1.0 per bundle
All other trunk modules 1.0
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 19
Table 7-19 Logical Slot Requirements for Server Modules
Server Modules
Logical
Slots
PX-3 0.03125 to 2.0 per
port
PrimeSwitch 0.25 per card if 8
ports are installed
PrimeVoice/6 0.5
PrimeVoice/12 0.5
PrimeVoice/24 1.0
Table 7-20 Logical Slot Requirements for Voice Modules
Voice Modules
Logical
Slots
PRC 2.0
TMCP 2.0
PVA/C 0.25
Table 7-21 Logical Slot Requirements for Data Modules
Data Modules
1
1. Also refer to Table 7-22.
Logical
Slots
HSD-2B 0.25 to 2.0
USD 0.25 to 2.0
QASD 0.125 to 0.25
DMD 0.125 to 0.25
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Logical SlotsPort Speeds
The number of logical slots required by data modules based on port
speeds is shown in Table 7-22.

Table 7-22 Data Module Logical SlotsPort Speed
Module Maximum Port Speed Logical Slots
DMD 19.2 kbps 0.125
64 kbps 0.25
HSD-2B (Logical slots always
are assigned on a per port basis
and vary depending on the
aggregate bandwidth of the
HSD-2B ports.
256 kbps 0.125
512 kbps 0.25
1.024 Mbps 0.5
2.048 Mbps 1.0
8.192 Mbps 4.0
PX (Logical slots always are
assigned on a per port basis
and vary depending on the
aggregate bandwidth of the PX
ports.)
64 kbps 0.03125
128 kbps 0.0625
256 kbps 0.125
512 kbps 0.25
1.024 Mbps 0.5
2.048 Mbps 1.0
4.096 Mbps 2.0
QASD 19.2 kbps 0.125
64 kbps 0.25
USD 256 kbps 0.25
512 kbps 0.50
1.024 Mbps 1.0
2.048 Mbps 2.0
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 21
Minimum Load Board
The minimum load board (MLB) is used in Promina shelves that do not
have sufficient current consumption to regulate power supplies. One
MLB card draws approximately 5.5 A (+5 V DC).
The front panel has LEDs labeled CARD ACTIVE, +5V, and ground test
points.
standard equipment modules, for example BXs, cannot regulate the
power supplies by themselves. In some configurations, an EXS may
require more than one MLB.
Since the Operator Interface does not recognize the MLB, a placeholder
card is installed in the database. The OI response is: Card installed but
not found by software in slot (Slot type: NONE).
The MLB has no interface card. It does not interface with either the TBus
or CBus and does not use any system load units or logical slots.
The MLB can be installed in any empty feature slot in the EXS shelf only
(no more than two per shelf). With the MLB dissipating approximately 30
watts of heat, there should be one empty slot on each side of an MLB for
proper cooling (Figure 7-7).
Note: Remove the MLB from the shelf when the total load of the modules
exceeds the shelfs minimum load requirement. Return the MLBs to net.com
Figure 7-7 MLB Installed in a Promina 800 EXS (Front View)
GND
MLB
+5V
A
S
S
Y
0
2
0
4
3
2
REV
CARD
ACTIVE
Empty MLB Empty
16
31
BX BX
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 22 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
System Load
Current
Requirements
The MLB requirements for all shelves based on a minimum configuration
of standard equipment modules are listed in Table 7-23. Any additional
modules such as trunk, data, or voice modules can reduce the number of
MLB boards needed for a shelf. Power consumption calculations for a
shelf are based on the +5 V current consumption for the respective feature
modules.

Table 7-23 System Load Current Requirements
Shelf/Node
Type
Power
Supplies
standard
equipment
Configuration
Minimum
+5 V Load
Required
in Amps
standard
equipment
Modules
No. of
MLBs
Required
Promina 800
HSS
250 W Redundant
standard
equipment
0 2 PPM NA
250 W Nonredundant
standard
equipment
0 1 PPM NA
Promina 800
STS
250 W RCE 0 2 BX 0
250 W NRCE 0 1 BX 0
Promina 800
EXS
400 W RCE 10 2 BX 2
400 W NRCE 1 1 BX 1
Promina 400
(12-slot)
Processor Shelf
250 W RCE 0 2 PLM, 1 bus
terminator
0
250 W NRCE 0 1 PLM, 1 bus
terminator
0
Promina 400
(24-slot)
Processor Shelf
250 W RCE 0 2 PLM, 1 bus
repeater
0
250 W NRCE 0 1 PLM, 1 bus
repeater
0
Promina 400
Expansion Shelf
250 W RCE 2 1 bus terminator, 1
bus repeater end
1
250 W NRCE 2 1 bus terminator, 1
bus repeater end
1
Promina 200 Power
Assembly
RCE 8 2 PLM 2
Power
Assembly
NRCE 3 1 PLM 1
Promina 100 Power
Assembly
NRCE 0 1 IPLM 0
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 23
Configuration
Requirements
In configuring a shelf with an MLB, you must :
List the MLB in the system configuration as part of the sales order.
Install the MLB in all EXSs that do not meet minimum load
requirements (see Table 7-23).
Install a minimum of two MLBs per empty EXS.
Install the MLB between two empty slots to ensure adequate cooling.
MLBs cannot be installed in a Promina 800 HSS-2.
Note: MLBs must be removed from a shelf and returned to net.com when they
are no longer required.
Bus Cards The following bus cards do not require a front card:
bus terminatorthe endpoint of the system buses on the standard
shelf.
shelf bus interface (SBI)the interface between the SXI-2 and the
HSS-2 backplane. There is an SBI-2 interface card for Domain A on
the HSS-2 and an SBI-2 interface card for Domain B on the same
HSS-2. Both SBI-2 cards are cabled to a port on an SXI-2.
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 24 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
T1 Jackfield
The T1 jackfield assembly (Figure 7-8) is standard for the EXS but
optional for the STS. It provides the interface between the T1 trunk and
the Promina T1 trunk hardware. One jackfield per cabinet is installed to
support up to eight trunks (seven trunks for a Promina 200). The T1
jackfield is rack-mounted externally on all configurations except for
cabinet enclosures; direct test access to the T1 trunks is provided for
maintenance. The T1 jackfield includes system cooling fans and supports
DC powered fans only.
Figure 7-8 T1 Jackfield

IDNX
LINE
MON
Front
LINE
IDNX
Rear
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FANS
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 25
Alarm Panel Assembly
The alarm panel assembly (Figure 7-9) consists of front and rear alarm
panels. The assembly also provides support for mounting the optional fan
tray and the power supply tray that supplies power to the Aux module.
The configurations available for the alarm panel assembly are:
alarm panel assembly
alarm panel assembly and fan tray
alarm panel assembly, power supply tray (RCE, NRCE, upgrade), and
Aux module
alarm panel assembly and fan tray, power supply tray (RCE, NRCE,
upgrade), and Aux module
The alarm panel assembly connects to the PPM or PLM through the
PPMI/PLMI card which supports the external alarm. In Figure 7-9, the
perforated cover has been removed from the alarm panel assembly with
the optional Aux power supply tray and fan tray.
Figure 7-9 Alarm Panel Assembly-Aux Power Supply and Fan Trays
Fan Tray
Primary
Power Supply
Power Supply
Alarm
Redundant
Power Supply
Alarm Panel
Mounting
Bracket
DC Power
Output Harness
Rear
AC Power Input
Receptacles
Panel
Assembly
Tray
Alarm Front Panel
Fan Receptacles
Mesh
Screen
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 26 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Front Alarm Panel-2
The Front Alarm Panel-2 has switches for controlling and testing the
Alarm Panel-2 and its status LEDs (Figure 7-10).
Refer to the Alarms and Events manual for more information about
alarms.
Figure 7-10 Front Alarm Panel-2
The Front Alarm Panel-2 LEDs are described in Table 7-24.
The Front Alarm Panel-2 works with the interfaces on the PPMI and
PLMI modules. The alarm panel generates alarms based on
user-specified alarm thresholds (thresholds are set through the Operator
Interface). When an alarm occurs that meets or exceeds the nodes
specified alarm threshold, the Alarm Panel generates an audible alarm
and activates an LED on the panel.
Alarm Panel-2
Connections
The Rear Alarm Panel-2 (Figure 7-11) has four connectors, a terminal
block for external alarms, and power connections for an optional fan tray.
The audible alarm is mounted on the inside of the rear alarm panel.
ALARM CUT OFF AUDIBLE DISABLE ALARM TEST
Table 7-24 Front Alarm Panel-2 LEDs
LEDs Operation
Alarm Lights when an alarm condition is present.
Alarm Cut-Off Disables the audible alarm and lights the Alarm Cut-Off and Alarm
lamps. Both lamps remain lit until Alarm-2 is cleared in the
Operator Interface.
Audible Disable Disables the audible alarm during servicing and lights the Audible
Disable lamp.
Test Emulates the signal caused by a power supply failure. Push and
hold this button for ten seconds to simulate an alarm condition; for
example, a power supply failure.
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 27
Figure 7-11 Rear Alarm Panel-2
Rear Alarm Connectors
CPU-1, CPU-2, CPU-3, and CPU-4 provide the connection from the
alarm to the PPMI or PLMI. The CPU-3 and CPU-4 are shielded
connectors specifically designed to be used with the PPMI/PLMI and the
shielded alarm cable. The CPU-1 and CPU-2 connectors use flat ribbon
cables and connect to the PPMI or PLMI. All four ports can be used
simultaneously.
The External Alarm (Figure 7-11) is used for connecting external
alarm-generating equipment. It functions as an input to generate an alarm
condition. Pulling the EXT ALM IN, signal low, generates an alarm. This
is functionally identical to using the Test button on the front panel.
The Summary Alarm (Figure 7-11) provides a summary of all the
connected nodes. To use the summary alarm feature, all unused
connectors on Rear Alarm Panel-2 must have a jumper connecting pin 7
to pin 9.
Jumper and position indicators are located next to the connector on the
face of the panel. Pin 7 to pin 9 is the no alarm feedback path and is
required to complete the path through all the connectors.
If there are no alarms and all unused connectors are jump-connected from
pin 7 to pin 9, the normally closed (NC) position is connected to COM
and the normally open (NO) position is open. If one or more of the nodes
are in an alarm state, and pins 7 to 9 are jump connected, NC is open and
NO is closed or connected to COM. Consequently, summary alarm is in
the alarm state when NC is open and NO is closed.
CPU
3
4
I
N
C
O
M
N
C
N
O
C
O
M
EXT ALM SUM ALM
Alarm Connectors
1
2
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 28 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Serial Port Interface
The network operator can configure and monitor the network by
connecting to a node with one of the following devices:
a terminal to access the Operator Interface
a workstation to access the PanaVue Management graphic interface
Each processor and server module interface card serial port supports the
RS-232C serial protocol and baud rates up to 56 kbps. An RJ-45 cable
connects the terminal or workstation to a Promina processor or server
module interface serial port. The interface serial ports for each Promina
system are listed in Table 7-25.
Table 7-25 Processor Interface Cards
Promina Nodes Processor Interface
Promina 800 PPMI serial port
PSMI serial port
Promina 400 PLMI serial port
PSMI serial port (optional)
Promina 200 PLMI serial port
PSMI serial port (optional)
Promina 100 Auxiliary serial port
Console serial port
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 29
Cross Connects The RS-232C cross connects between a customers DTE and the Promina
RJ-45 serial port (Yost standard) are shown in Figure 7-12. The RJ-45 to
RS-232C null-modem cable connects the DTE device to the Promina
interface card.
Figure 7-12 RS-232C Cross Connects
The net.com null modem cables that are available for connecting a DTE
device to a Promina RJ-45 serial port are listed in Table 7-26.
Baud Rates The baud speed of the terminal or workstation and the node serial port
must be identical. Refer to the terminal or workstation manufacturers
documentation for setting baud rates. Each processor and server module
interface card serial port supports the RS-232C serial protocol and baud
rates up to 56 kbps.
Serial Port Pinouts The RS-232C DCE is a 25-pin female D-type connector. The RS-232C
DCE pinouts are shown in Table 7-27.
PPMI/PLMI/PSMI
5 1
8 2
3 3
7 4
7 5
2 6
20 7
4 8
DB-25 RJ-45
CTS RTS
DCD DTR
RXD TXD
GND GND
GND GND
TXD RXD
DTR DCD
RTS CTS
Hook Up
Customer DTE
Table 7-26 RJ-45 to RS-232C Null Modem Cable
Description Length (feet) Part Number
Console Cable RJ-45 to DB-25 10 029074-010
Modem Cable RJ-45 to DB-25 10 029075-010
Y-Modem Cable RJ-45/RJ-45 to DB-25 10 029076-010
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 30 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Table 7-27 Dual RS-232 DCE Pinouts
Pin Name Signal Comment
1 AA Frame Ground
2 BA Transmit Data To node
3 BB Receive Data From node
4 CA Request to Send To node
5 CB Clear to Send From node
6 CC Data Set Ready From node
7 AB Signal Ground
8 CF Data Carrier Detect From node
9 Remote Loop To node
10 Local Loop To node
11 TM Test Mode From node
12 Secondary Carrier Detect From node
13 SCB Secondary Clear to Send From node
14 SBA Secondary Transmit Data To node
15 TC Transmit Clock From node
16 SBB Secondary Receive Data From node
17 RT Receive Clock From node
18 Spare
19 SCA Secondary Request to Send To node
20 CD Data Terminal Ready To node
21 CG Signal Quality Detect From node
22 CE Ring Indicator From node
23 Spare
24 DA External Transmit Clock To node
25 Spare
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 7 - 31
The RS-232C DTE is a 25-pin male D-type connector. Table 7-28 lists
the RS-232 DTE pinouts.
Table 7-28 Dual RS-232 DTE Pinouts
Pin
1
1. Pins 2, 3, 5, 7, and 8 are the minimum required signals. For a simple
3-wire interface, looping pin 20 to pin 8 and pin 4 to pin 5 on the system
side plug provides the necessary control signals.
Name Signal Comment
1 AA Frame Ground
2 BA Transmit Data From node
3 BB Receive Data To node
4 CA Request From Send From node
5 CB Clear From Send To node
6 CC Data Set Ready To node
7 AB Signal Ground
8 CF Data Carrier Detect To node
9 Remote Loop To node
10 Local Loop To node
11 TM Test Mode To node
12 Secondary Carrier Detect To node
13 SCB Secondary Clear From Send To node
14 SBA Secondary Transmit Data From node
15 TC Transmit Clock To node
16 SBB Secondary Receive Data To node
17 RT Receive Clock To node
18 Spare
19 SCA Secondary Request From Send From node
20 CD Data Terminal Ready From node
21 CG Signal Quality Detect To node
22 CE Ring Indicator To node
23 Spare
24 DA External Transmit Clock From node
25 Spare
Promina System Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 32 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Determining Bandwidth
Trunk overhead bandwidth calculations are used to determine whether
enough trunks are available to support the traffic anticipated on a node.
Consider these factors when calculating trunk overhead bandwidth:
fixed overhead bandwidth (for detailed information, refer to the
Trunk Modules manual)
transparent signaling overhead
trunk asynchronous (TA) bandwidth and pass-through timing
Transparent
Signaling
Overhead
The speed of a port determines how much bandwidth is required for a call
originating from that port. For example, INTU-560W calls configured for
transparent signaling require bandwidth greater than their port speed.
Trunk
Asynchronous
Bandwidth
A trunk asynchronous (TA) call is any of the following:
a port with a speed not divisible by 8 kbps
an INTU-560W (net.com mode) asynchronous call
an INTU-560W port configured for 48 kbps
an INTU-560W port configured for pass-through timing
Calculating the amount of TA bandwidth required per TA call is a
complicated process. Factors to consider include the trunk type, the port
speed, and the number of TA calls on the trunk. Contact an net.com sales
representative for accurate bandwidth calculations.
Pass-Through
Timing
Pass-through timing allows an independently synchronized data circuit to
be passed through a node without errors or data loss when a different
clock source is used. For example, INTU-560W ports configured for
pass-through timing require TA bandwidth whether or not they are
divisible by 8 kbps.
Synchronous
Timing
Synchronous timing for INTU-560W ports requires an additional one
percent of the configured port speed for TA calls. For example, an
INTU-560W synchronous port configured for 9.6 kbps requires a total of
9696 bits of bandwidth. One percent is added to the port speed before the
TA bandwidth is determined.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Chapt er 8
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 1
8Oper at or I nt er f ace
Commands
This chapter contains the Operator Interface commands used for the
configuration of modules in this manual along with descriptions and
examples. The description of each command includes the following
information:
Menu path
Expert mode command
Inputs required to execute the command
Sample screen displays
The commands that apply to overall node and call management can be
found in the Node Management manual.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Expert Mode Command Summary
In the following table, letters in bold print are the minimum letters that
must be entered to invoke a command.
Action Object Meaning
Activate Card/Port Places a card or port in an active status (that is,
logically functioning and available for service).
Domain Place a domain in active status.
Cancel Test Cancels a test on a card, e.g. SX, BX.
Deactivate Card/Port Places a card or port in test mode (that is, unavailable
for calls).
Delete PSM Card
Card/Port
Removes a card, or port definition from the
configuration database.
Disable Card/Port Removes a card or port from service.
Domain Place a domain in inactive state.
Enable Card/Port Places a card or port in test mode (unavailable for
calls).
Install PSM Card
Card/Port
Adds a card or port definition to the configuration
database.
Modify PSM Card
Card/Port
Changes the card or port parameters.
Query BX Card
CPU Card
PPM Card
PSM Card
SX Card
Displays the card configuration for the specified card
types (only available in expert mode).
Card/Port Displays the configuration for the specified card or
port.
System Components Displays Alarm information on the PPM.
Report Card Reports on the test results for a card, e.g. SX, BX.
Restart Processor Restarts a nodal controller (i.e. PPM).
PSM Restarts the Promina Server Module (PSM).
Switch Domain Switches the offline domain online in a Promina 800
when redundant SX modules are installed.
PSM Switches to the redundant Promina Server Module
(PSM)
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 3
Test Card Starts a test sequence on a card, e.g. SX, BX.
Action Object Meaning
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Activate Card
Syntax activate card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > ACTIVATE > CARD
Expert Mode ac car
Description Activates a data card to indicate a logical function and available for
service.
After a card is activated, it performs various start-up functions such as
diagnostics, and ports that have an destination port place a call.
When you install or modify a card with the Install and Modify
commands, the Operator Interface also displays a prompt to activate the
available card.
When a range is specified, filters are used to select specified cards to
activate.
Parameters Card ID.
Example None.
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 5
Activate Domain
Syntax activate domain
Menu Path None
Expert Mode ac d
Description Activates and disables offline domain on Promina 800 by providing
system redundancy through two domains designated A and B.
If Promina 800 encounters failure during the activate domain process,
you receive a message that the command has aborted.
Activate Domain command is available only from expert command
mode.
Note: This command is not related to partitioning the network into domains
using the network gateway feature.
Parameters None.
Example To activate a particular domain, enter either yes or no.
< act domain,n199
Do you want to ACTIVATE Domain B? [NO]
YES OR NO = y
N199 Domain B has been Activated.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section the SX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Activate Port
Syntax activate port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > ACTIVATE > PORT
Expert Mode ac po
Description Activates a port to indicate a logical function and available for service.
After a port is activated, it performs various start-up functions suchas
diagnostics, and ports that have an destination port place a call.
When you install or modify a port with the Install and Modify
commands, the Operator Interface also displays a prompt to activate the
available port.
When a range is specified, filters are used to select specified cards or
ports to activate.
Parameters Port ID.
Example To activate the applicable port, enter either yes or no.
< act port,n3c5p3
Do you want to ACTIVATE port N3C5P3? [YES]
(Enter ? to display port configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** SSC Port N3C5P3 has been ACTIVATED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 7
Cancel Test
Syntax cancel test
Menu Path DIAGNOSTIC > CANCEL > TEST
Expert Mode ca t
Description Stops a test in progress on a card after the next test iteration.
cancel test command is used to stop long-running diagnostics. Use the
Report Test Results command to display any partial test results for all
iterations performed before the cancel test command. An operator can
cancel tests on trunk cards, voice server cards, and the DMD, BX, or SX
cards.
To stop a test on other cards and ports, use the Disable Card or Disable
Port commands.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To cancel test, enter the card ID.
2. To confirm cancellation, enter either yes or no.
< cancel test
CANCEL which card?
CARD ID = n3c38
*** PVA Card N3C38 Configuration (CPU: C4) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: PVA
Installed Ports: 3 Ports/BO Cycle: 4
State: POWER-UP/SELF-TEST
CANCEL TEST on this card? [YES]
YES OR NO = y
*** Diagnostic Test Results for card N3C38 ***
Test Type: SELF-TEST Iterations: 4
Errors = 0
Test Status: IN PROGRESS
*** Command Complete ***
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Deactivate Card
Syntax deactivate card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION>DEACTIVATE>CARD
Expert Mode dea car
Description Places a card in test mode to run diagnostics on card.
If a card is deactivated, it is unavailable for calls. When a card port is
deactivated, it becomes unavailable for calls.
Also, the operator can use the enable command to enable the card or port
for diagnostics.
When an operator specifies a range, filters can be used to select specific
cards to deactivate.
There
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To deactivate a card, enter the applicable card ID.
2. To confirm the card ID, enter either yes or no.
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 9
Deactivate Port
Syntax deactivate port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION>DEACTIVATE>PORT
Expert Mode dea po
Description Places a port in test mode to run diagnostics on the port.
When a port is deactivated, it becomes unavailable for calls.
Also, the operator can use the Enable command to enable the port for
diagnostics.
When an operator specifies a range, filters can be used to select specific
ports to deactivate.
Parameters Port ID.
Example To deactivate a particular port, enter either yes or no.
< dea port,N3C25P10
Do you want to DEACTIVATE port N3C25P10? [YES]
(Enter ? to display port configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** SSC Port N3C25P10 has been DISABLED.
*** SSC Port N3C25P10 has been DEACTIVATED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Delete Card
Syntax delete card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > DELETE > CARD
Expert Mode del car
Description Removes card definitions from the configuration database.
Before deleting a card, the Operator Interface displays the card or port
configuration (unless you are in Display Mode and the session parameter
is set to Terse) and prompts to confirm the deletion.
Deleting a card also deletes all installed ports on the card.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To delete a card, enter the card ID.
2. To confirm deletion, enter either yes or no.
< del card
DELETE which CARD(s)? [ALL ON THIS NODE]
CARD ID = N3C1
Do you want to DELETE card N3C1? [YES]
(Enter ? to display card configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** PPM Card N3C1 has been DEACTIVATED.
*** PPM Card N3C1 has been DISABLED.
*** PPM Card N3C1 has been DELETED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 11
Delete Port
Syntax delete port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > DELETE > PORT
Expert Mode del po
Description Removes port definitions from the configuration database.
Before deleting a port, the Operator Interface displays the port
configuration (unless you are in Display Mode and the session parameter
is set to Terse) and prompts to confirm the deletion.
Deleting a data card also deletes all installed ports on the card.
Parameters Port ID.
Example None.
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Delete PSM
Syntax delete psm
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > DELETE > PSM
Expert Mode del psm
Description Removes the PSM from the database of a specific node.
Parameters Node ID.
Example To delete PSM, enter the node ID.
ENTER COMMAND [DELETE PSM)]
< del psm
DELETE PSM ON WHICH NODE(S)? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
*** PSM RECORD DELETED
*** COMMAND COMPLETE ***
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 13
Disable Card
Syntax disable card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > DISABLE > CARD
Expert Mode di car
Description Removes card from service.
Before disabling a card, the Operator Interface displays the configuration
and prompts for a disable confirmation (unless you are in Display Mode
and the session parameter is set to Terse). When a card is disabled, you
cannot run diagnostics or use the card. Disabling a card with a diagnostic
test in progress stops the test.
When you specify a range, you can use filters to select specific cards to
disable.
Parameters Card ID.
Example None.
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Disable Domain
Syntax disable domain
Menu Path None.
Note: Disable Domain command is available only in expert command mode.
Expert Mode di d
Description Disables the offline domain on Promina 800.
The Promina 800 provides system redundancy through two domains (A
and B).
Only the offline domain is disabled. If the offline domain has switched to
online during execution of this command, you receive a message that the
command has aborted.
Note: Disable Domain command is not related to partitioning the network
into domains.
Parameters None.
Example To disable domain A on Node 29, enter either yes or no.
< dis domain,n199
Do you want to DISABLE Domain B? [NO]
YES OR NO = y
N199 Domain B has been Disabled.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on the SX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 15
Disable Port
Syntax disable port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > DISABLE > PORT
Expert Mode di po
Description Removes the port from service.
Before disabling a port, the Operator Interface displays the configuration
and prompts for a disable confirmation (unless you are in Display Mode
and the session parameter is set to Terse). When a port is disabled you
cannot run diagnostics or use the port. Disabling a port with a diagnostic
test in progress stops the test.
When you specify a range, you can use filters to select specific ports to
disable.
Parameters Port ID.
Example To confirm the disable port, enter either yes or no.
< dis port,c4p0
Do you want to DISABLE port N90C4P0? [YES]
(Enter '?' to display port configuration.)
YES OR NO = y
*** SSC Port N90C4P0 has been DISABLED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 16 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Enable Card
Syntax enable card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > ENABLE > CARD
Expert Mode e car
Description Places a card in test mode to run diagnostics on the card.
When you enable a card, it becomes unavailable for calls.
Diagnostics is performed after a card port is enabled.
When you specify a range, you can use filters to select specific cards to
enable.
Parameters Card ID.
Example To enable a card, enter the card ID.
< ena card
ENABLE which CARD(s)? [ALL ON THIS NODE]
CARD ID = n3c30
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 17
Enable Port
Syntax enable port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > ENABLE > PORT
Expert Mode e po
Description Places a port in test mode to run diagnostics on the port.
When you enable a port, it becomes unavailable for calls.
Diagnostics is performed after a port is enabled.
When you specify a range, you can use filters to select specific ports to
enable.
Parameters Port ID.
Example To confirm the enable port, enter either yes or no.
< ena port,c4p0
Do you want to ENABLE port N90C4P0? [YES]
(Enter '?' to display port configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** SSC Port N90C4P0 has been ENABLED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 18 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Install Card
Syntax install card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > INSTALL > CARD
Expert Mode ins car
Description Install Card command defines the configuration parameters for the
card. After installation, you can change parameters by using the Modify
Card command.
When a card parameter has only two choices, the Operator Interface
automatically changes the value when you select the parameter. When
there are more than two choices, the Operator Interface displays a prompt
for input. Enter a question mark ? to display a list of values.
The Operator Interface provides a default card type if the card is in the
specified slot on the node. A warning message is displayed if you select a
card type that does not match the type of card that is physically installed
in the slot.
Install the card before installing the ports on the card. Prepare a port map
that shows the port connections and port configurations to assist you
during port installation. To save time, you can copy the port configuration
from an existing port.
When you install all cards on the node, the Operator Interface prompts
you to specify filters.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. Enter the card type.
2. Enter the parameter index.
3. To confirm parameters, enter either yes or no.
ENTER COMMAND [INSTALL CARD]
< install car,N2C1
Do you want to install card N2C1? [NO]
YES OR NO = y
*** Installable Card Types ***
[ 0] TRK [20] INTU-560 [40] LS-TRK
[ 1] LDCELP12 [21] X50 [41] SATRK
[ 2] LDCELP24 [22] HSD-2 [42] PX PLUS
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 19
[ 3] LDCELP12 [23] TMCP [43] E3-TRK
[ 4] LDCELP24 [24] T3_TRK [44] VCFAX-24
[ 5] CX [25] QXP [45] VCFAX-12
[ 6] QSD [26] TK64 [46] PX-3
[ 7] TRK-2 [27] I422-TRK [47] TRK-3
[ 8] HSD [28] QASD [48] ECHOX
[ 9] DS-1 [29] HDVC24 [49] APX
[10] USD [30] HDVC12 [50] SX-2
[11] MEM [31] QAVP [51] PLM
[12] QSD-2 [32] BX [52] *PPM
[13] TK56 [33] SX [53] LDCELP6
[14] PRC [34] HPC [54] HLC
[15] DS0A [35] DS0B [55] PVEC
[16] VC31 [36] PX [56] PVE24
[17] VC62 [37] PX-2 [57] HINTU
[18] DMD [38] PVAC [58] SCLX
[19] INTU-558 [39] PVA
NOTE: * marks default selection.
Enter card type for card N2C1? [PPM]
CARD TYPE = 52
*** PPM Card N2C1 has been INSTALLED.
*** PPM card N2C1 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Alarm/Monitor Interface = YES
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =
Do you want to ACTIVATE card PPM? [YES]
(Enter ? to display card configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 20 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Install Port
Syntax install port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > INSTALL > PORT
Expert Mode ins po
Description Install Port command defines the configuration parameters for the
card or port. After installation, you can change parameters by using the
Modify Port command.
When a port parameter has only two choices, the Operator Interface
automatically changes the value when you select the parameter. When
there are more than two choices, the Operator Interface displays a prompt
for input. Enter a question mark ? to display a list of values.
The Operator Interface provides a default card type if the card is in the
specified slot on the node. A warning message is displayed if you select a
card type that does not match the type of card that is physically installed
in the slot.
Install the card before installing the ports on the card. Prepare a port map
that shows the port connections and port configurations to assist you
during port installation. To save time, you can copy the port configuration
from an existing port.
When you install all ports on the node, the Operator Interface prompts
you to specify filters.
Parameters Port ID.
Example None.
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 21
Install PSM
Syntax install psm
Menu Path None.
Note: Install PSM command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode ins psm
Description Configures PSM parameters.
Parameters Node ID.
Example 1. To install PSM, enter the node ID.
2. Enter the parameter index.
3. To confirm installation, enter either yes or no.
ENTER 'NORMAL' TO RETURN TO NORMAL COMMAND MODE.
ENTER COMMAND [INSTALL LINK]
< ins psm
INSTALL PSM ON WHICH NODE? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
*** PSM CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ***
[ 0] Console Baud Rate = 9600
[ 1] Auxiliary Baud Rate = 9600
[ 2] External IP = 0.0.0.0
[ 3] Subnet Mask = 0xFFFF0000
[ 4] PSM1 Assigned CardId = NONE
[ 5] PSM2 Assigned CardId = NONE
[10] Aux Port PPP access = DISABLED
[11] PPP Baud Rate = 9600
[12] PPP Local IP = 0.0.0.0
[13] PPP Remote IP = 0.0.0.0
[14] PPP tyCo Device = /tyCo/1
[15] MTU Size = 576 bytes
ENTER PARAMETER INDEX (OR HIT RETURN TO CONTINUE)
PARAMETER INDEX =
ARE ALL PARAMETERS CORRECT? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PSM RECORD UPDATED
*** COMMAND COMPLETE ***
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 22 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
See Also See the section on the PSM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 23
Modify Card
Syntax modify card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > MODIFY > CARD
Expert Mode mod car
Description Changes the parameters (or definitions) of cards installed in the
configuration database.
Cards must be disabled before they are modified. If you have not disabled
the card, the Operator Interface asks if you want the card disabled.
When a card parameter only has two choices, the Operator Interface
automatically changes the value. When there are more than two choices,
the Operator Interface displays a prompt for input. Enter a question mark
? to display a list of values.
Parameters Card ID.
Example To specify a card, enter the card ID.
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 24 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Modify Port
Syntax modify port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > MODIFY > PORT
Expert Mode mod po
Description Changes the parameters (or definitions) of ports installed in the
configuration database.
Ports are automatically disabled.
When a port parameter only has two choices, the Operator Interface
automatically changes the value. When there are more than two choices,
the Operator Interface displays a prompt for input. Enter a question mark
? to display a list of values.
Parameters Port ID.
Example 1. Enter the parameter index.
2. To confirm parameters are correct, enter either yes or no.
3. To activate port, enter either yes or no.
Enter command [MODIFY PORT]
< mod port,c5p1
*** PPM Port N2C5P1 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ANS-ONLY
[ 5] Port Speed = 16000 bps
[11] IP Only = YES
Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =y
*** PPM Port N2C5P1 has been ACTIVATED.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 25
Modify PSM
Syntax modify psm
Menu Path None.
Note: Modify PSM command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode mod psm
Description Changes the configuration of the Promina Server Module (PSM).
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To modify the PSM, enter the node ID.
2. Enter the parameter index.
3. Enter the baud rate for the PPP port.
4. To confirm the parameters are correct, enter either yes or no.
ENTER 'NORMAL' TO RETURN TO NORMAL COMMAND MODE.
ENTER COMMAND [UPDATE BACKUP]
< mod psm
MODIFY PSM ON WHICH NODE? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
*** PSM CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ***
[ 0] Console Baud Rate = 9600
[ 1] Auxiliary Baud Rate = 9600
[ 2] External IP = 0.0.0.0
[ 3] Subnet Mask = 0xFFFF0000
[ 4] PSM1 Assigned CardId = NONE
[ 5] PSM2 Assigned CardId = NONE
[10] Aux Port PPP access = DISABLED
[11] PPP Baud Rate = 9600
[12] PPP Local IP = 0.0.0.0
[13] PPP Remote IP = 0.0.0.0
[14] PPP tyCo Device = /tyCo/1
[15] MTU Size = 576 bytes
ENTER PARAMETER INDEX (OR HIT RETURN TO CONTINUE)
PARAMETER INDEX = 11
Enter Baud Rate for PPP port
BAUD RATE = 38400

*** N1 PSM Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Console Baud Rate = 9600
[ 1] Auxiliary Baud Rate = 9600
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 26 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
[ 2] External IP = 0.0.0.0
[ 3] Subnet Mask = 0xFFFF0000
[ 4] PSM1 Assigned CardId = NONE
[ 5] PSM2 Assigned CardId = NONE
[10] Aux Port PPP access = DISABLED
[11] PPP Baud Rate = 38400
[12] PPP Local IP = 0.0.0.0
[13] PPP Remote IP = 0.0.0.0
[14] PPP tyCo Device = /tyCo/1
[15] MTU Size = 576 bytes

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
ARE ALL PARAMETERS CORRECT? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** PSM RECORD UPDATED
*** COMMAND COMPLETE ***
See Also See the section on the PSM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 27
Query BX Card
Syntax query bx card
Menu Path None.
Note: Query BX Card command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode q bx
Description Queries a card with a BX card filter.
Parameters Card ID.
Example
*** BX Card N4C46 Configuration (CPU:C3) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: BX (Rev G)
Serial Number: 647273
Status: ONLINE
Domain : A Redundant BX: C47
Active Domain: A SX Port: C0P2
See Also See the section on the BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 28 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Query Card
Syntax query card
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > QUERY > CARD
Expert Mode q car
Description Displays detailed or summary information for one or more cards or ports
in the local domain.
Specifying All defaults to all the cards installed in the default node.
The display mode controls the amount and format of the display. Detailed
mode displays the configuration information and any status information.
Summary mode displays a subset of this information. The default display
mode is the last selected mode.
Query Card command displays installed cards only. To display cards that
are not installed, you can use filters to define the slot types or the card
status.
An asterisk (*) next to the Database Card Type indicates that the card is
installed in the database but is not physically installed in the card slot on
the node.
An S in the column between Database Card Type and Slot Card Type
indicates a switched trunk.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To query a card, enter the card ID.
2. To specify card filters, enter either yes or no,
3. Select either Detail or Summary mode.
ENTER COMMAND [QUERY CARD]
< quer card,c5
Enter display mode (DETAIL or SUMMARY) [D]
DISPLAY MODE (D OR S) =
*** PPM Card N7C5 Configuration (Cpu:C5) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: PPM (Rev F)
Serial Number: 1476531
Part Number: 024483-203
Idle Time: 100 Bytes of RAM Left: 20631760
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 29
RTC overruns: 0 CBUS Interrupts/Second: 1
Alarm Panel I/F: ENABLED Cpu Status: MASTER
DB Checksum: 891A92
Perm Boot Version: 46.4 Code Version: 3.71.18
Wrt Boot Version: 71.1
Load Units: 7 Current GMT: UNKNOWN
Power Up: 167:18:01 ago Restart: 112:33:52 ago
CPU Restart Count: 1 Task Restart Count: 0
*** Console Port Configuration ***
Console Port 0: Speed=AUTOBAUD Type=GLASS TTY Mode=OPERATOR CONSOLE
*** Interface Information ***
Serial Number: 1459389 Revision: A
*** Task Distribution ***
Number of Installed SSC Ports: 0
Internal IP Addr: 11.169.112.115
Packets RX: 386993 Packets TX: 330071
RX Errors: 0 TX Errors: 0
Collisions: 115
Gateway IP Addr: 10.169.112.113
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 30 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Query CPU Card
Syntax query cpu card
Menu Path None.
Note: Query CPU Card command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode q cpu
Description Queries all processor cards using PPM as card filters.
Parameters Card ID.
See Also PPM Module on page 3-2.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 31
Query PPM Card
Syntax query ppm card
Menu Path None.
Note: Query PPM Card command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode q ppm
Description Queries a card with filters set to PPM card types.
Parameters Card ID.
Example
< q car, c4/d
*** PPM Card N1C4 Configuration (Cpu:C4) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: PPM (Rev B)
Serial Number: 1477138
Idle Time: 100 Bytes of RAM Left: 4887252
RTC overruns: 0 CBUS Interrupts/Second: 0
Alarm Panel I/F: ENABLED Cpu Status: MASTER
DB Checksum: 4F774C
Perm Boot Version: 43.7 Code Version: 2.45.5
Wrt Boot Version: 44.12
Load Units: 15 Current GMT: 23:50:38
Power Up: 167:47:26 ago Restart: 167:47:26 ago
CPU Restart Count: 0 Task Restart Count: 0
*** Console Port Configuration ***
Console Port 0: Speed=AUTOBAUD Type=GLASS TTY Mode=OPERATOR
CONSOLE
*** Task Distribution ***
PSC/SCLP : 16 17 32 33
CAS : 43 45
PKT INTERFACE : 25 26 27 36
Number of Installed SSC Ports: 0
Internal IP Addr: 11.0.0.19
Gateway IP Addr: 10.0.0.17
*** Hit RETURN to continue (ESCAPE to quit) ***
See Also See the section on the PPM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 32 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Query Port
Syntax query port
Menu Path CONFIGURATION > QUERY > PORT
Expert Mode q po
Description Displays detailed or summary information for one or more cards or ports
in the local domain.
Specifying All defaults to all the ports installed in the default node.
The display mode controls the amount and format of the display. Detailed
mode displays the configuration information and any status information.
Summary mode displays a subset of this information. The default display
mode is the last selected mode.
Query Port command displays the current configuration of a port and
the configuration of the destination port. The configuration of the
destination port is available only when the link is up and a destination
port is defined.
An asterisk (*) next to the Database Card Type indicates that the port is
installed in the database but is not physically installed in the card slot on
the node.
Parameters Port ID.
Example 1. To query a port, enter the port ID.
2. To specify port filters, enter either yes or no.
3. Select either Detail or Summary mode.
Enter command [QUERY PORT]
< query port,c5p1
Enter display mode (DETAIL or SUMMARY) [D]
DISPLAY MODE (D OR S) =
*** PPM Port N2C5P1 Configuration ***
Card Type: PPM Slot Type: PPM
DBCard Status: ACTIVE DB Port Status: ACTIVE
Orig/Ans Mode: ANS-ONLY
Port Speed: 16000
Port Type: SSC
IP Only: YES
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 33
Actual Path: NONE
*** PPM Port N2C5P1 Status ***
Call State: Idle/Down Last Disconnect: NONE
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the chapter on SSC and HTC ports.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 34 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Query PSM
Syntax query psm
Menu Path None.
Note: Query PSM command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode q psm
Description Displays the configuration of the Promina Server Module (PSM).
Parameters Card ID.
Example To query PSM on a default node, enter the node ID.
< q psm
QUERY PSM ON WHICH NODE? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID =
*** N1 PSM Database Configuration ***
Console Port: 9600 bps Auxiliary Port: 9600 bps
External IP: 0.0.0.0 PSM Card Ids: None
Subnet Mask: 0xFFFF0000
*** PSM PPP Configuration: PPP is DISABLED ***
PPP Baud Rate: 38400 bps MTU Size: 576 bytes
Local IP: 0.0.0.0 Remote IP: 0.0.0.0
tyCo Device: /tyCo/1
*** PSM Configuration ***
MAC Address: 0.80.B2.10.8E.82 Status: ONLINE
Internal IP: 11.0.0.17 Code Version: 15.3.1 v45.5
HW Serial No: 1354290 HW Revision: B
*** Hit RETURN to continue (ESCAPE to quit) ***
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 35
Query SX Card
Syntax query sx card
Menu Path None.
Note: Query SX Card command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode q sx
Description Queries a card with filters set to SX-2 card types.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To query a SX card, enter the card ID.
2. To confirm card filters, enter either yes or no.
3. Select either Detail Mode or Summary Mode.
Enter Command [QUERY SX CARD]
< q sx
QUERY which SX CARD(s)? [ALL ON THIS NODE]
CARD ID =
Do you want to specify any card filters? [NO]
YES OR NO =
Enter display mode (DETAIL or SUMMARY) [D]
DISPLAY MODE (D OR S) =
*** SX-2 Card N3C0 Configuration (Cpu:C4) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: SX-2 (Rev F)
Serial Number: 1325768 Firmware Rev: D
Active Domain: A Status: ONLINE
Domain: A Redundant SX: C15
*** System Components:
0> HSS 1> EXS 2> EXS 3> NONE
*** SX-2 Card N3C15 Configuration (Cpu:C4) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: SX-2 (Rev F)
Serial Number: 1325777 Firmware Rev: D
Active Domain: A Status: OFFLINE
Domain: B Redundant SX: C0
*** System Components:
0> HSS 1> EXS 2> EXS 3> NONE
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 36 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the SX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 37
Query System Components
Syntax query system components
Menu Path DIAGNOSTIC > QUERY > SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Expert Mode q sys
Description Displays the system component information for a Promina 800 node.
Configuration, service, online domain status, and P/S alarm status for
each shelf is displayed. P/S alarms for P800 are indicated by an * next to
the shelf number. Absence of the * indicates there is no P/S alarm.
Promina 800 provides system redundancy through two domains
designated A and B. There are four ports (numbered 0 through 3) on the
SX interface.
Note: This is not related to partitioning the network into domains.
Parameters None.
HSS(Cxxx)
Connects a high-speed shelf to the port.
STS(Cxxx)
Connects a standard shelf to the port.
EXS(Cxxx)
Connects an expansion shelf to the port.
T3(Cxxx)
Connects a T3TRK module to the port. The card ID is
listed.
None
Indicates a system component is not connected to the
port.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 38 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Example The following example displays the system component status for the
P800 system.
< q sys, n199
*** System Components for Node 199(ART_199) ***
Domain A: *0>HSS (C000) 1>EXS (C030) 2>EXS (C046) 3>EXS (C062)
4>EXS (C078) 5>NONE 6>T3E3(C007) 7>T3E3(C009)
Domain B: *0>HSS (C015) 1>EXS (C031) 2>EXS (C047) 3>EXS (C063)
4>EXS (C079) 5>NONE 6>T3E3(C007) 7>T3E3(C009)
Domain A Domain B
Config Status: ACTIVE ACTIVE
Service Status: ACTIVE STANDBY
Online Domain: A. System IS REDUNDANT
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PPM, SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 39
Report Card
Syntax report card
Menu Path DIAGNOSTIC > REPORT> CARD
Expert Mode rep car
Description Displays the results of the test that was most recently run through the
Operator Interface for the card.
Information displayed in the test result includes: type of test run, number
of iterations, error count, and receive and transmit status.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To report test results on a PRC card, enter the card ID.
2. To report test results on a digroup, enter the digroup.
Enter Command [REPORT CARD]
< report card,c31
*** BX Card N7C31 Configuration (Cpu:C5) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: BX (Rev ?)
Serial Number: 0
Status: OFFLINE
Domain : B Redundant BX: C30
Active Domain: A SX Port: C15P1
*** Previous Test: None
*** Command Complete ***
< report card,c0
*** SX-2 Card N7C0 Configuration (Cpu:C5) ***
DB Status: ACTIVE Slot Type: SX-2 (Rev G)
Serial Number: 1070552 Firmware Rev: D
Active Domain: A Status: ONLINE
Domain: A Redundant SX: C15
*** System Components:
0> HSS 1> EXS 2> EXS 3> EXS
*** Previous Test:
*** Diagnostics Test Results for SX-2 Card N7C0 ***
Test Type: 7Dx Iterations Requested: 65276
Iterations Completed : 0
Test Status: SUCCESS
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 40 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Error Count = 0
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the SX or BX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 41
Restart Processor
Syntax restart processor
Menu Path None.
Note: Restart Processor command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode rest pr
Description Restarts the PPM card.
After modifying the processor parameters, restart the processor. Before
restarting the processor, ensure there are enough coprocessors to handle
the load.
Note: Only Level 4 or higher operators can restart the processor.
There are no defaults and wildcard characters cannot be used.
After restarting the processor, the login prompt appears.
Caution: Restarting the master processor restarts the node.
Parameters Card ID.
Example 1. To restart,, enter the card ID.
2. To confirm the card ID, enter either yes or no.
rest pr
RESTART which PROCESSOR? [NO DEFAULT]
CARD ID = c44
Do you want to RESTART card N100C44? [YES]
(Enter '?' to display card configuration.)
YES OR NO =
*** PPM Card N100C44 has been RESTARTED ***
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See also the section on the PPM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 42 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Restart PSM
Syntax restart psm
Menu Path None.
Note: Restart Processor command is available only in expert mode.
Expert Mode rest ps
Description Restarts all of the PSM cards on the node.
Note: Only Level 4 or higher operators can restart the psm.
Default is [THIS NODE]. Wildcard characters cannot be used.
Parameters None.
Example
rest psm
RESTART PSM ON WHICH NODE? [THIS NODE]
NODE ID = n14
*** THIS COMMAND WILL CAUSE ALL PSMS ON NODE 14 TO BE RESTARTED
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS [NO]
YES OR NO = y
*** RESTARTING PSMS ON NODE 14, PLEASE WAIT...
*** THE PSMS HAVE BEEN RESTARTED ***
*** COMMAND COMPLETE ***
See Also See the section on the PSM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 43
Switch Domain
Syntax switch domain
Menu Path OPERATIONS > SWITCH > DOMAIN
Expert Mode sw d
Description Switches the offline domain online in a Promina 800 when redundant SX
modules are installed.
The Promina 800 provides system redundancy through two domains
designated A and B.
Note: Switch Domain command is available only for level 4 or higher
operators.
The redundant modules must be installed in the configuration database.
Note: This is not related to partitioning the network into domains.
Parameters None.
Example To switch a domain on line, enter either yes or no.
< switch domain,n193
*** System Components for Node 193(ART_193) ***
Domain A: 0>HSS (C000) 1>STS (C016) 2>STS (C032) 3>STS (C048)
4>STS (C064) 5>NONE 6>T3E3(C007) 7>T3E3(C006)
Domain B: 0>HSS (C015) 1>STS (C017) 2>STS (C033) 3>STS (C049)
4>STS (C065) 5>NONE 6>T3E3(C007) 7>T3E3(C006)
Domain A Domain B
Config Status: ACTIVE ACTIVE
Service Status: ACTIVE STANDBY
Online Domain: A. System IS REDUNDANT
Are you sure you want to switch domain? [NO]
YES OR NO = y
*** Domain Switchover Successful.
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See also the section on the SX module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 44 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Switch PSM
Syntax switch psm
Menu Path OPERATIONS>SWITCH>PSM
Expert Mode sw ps
Description Switches PSM offline.
Parameters None.
Example To confirm notifying offline PSM, enter either yes or no.
< switch psm
CPNotifyOfflinePSM (54)
Are you sure you want to do this? [NO]
YES OR NO = y
CPNotifyOfflinePSM Return = OK
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the PSM module.
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 8 - 45
Test Card
Syntax test card
Menu Path DIAGNOSTIC > TEST > CARD
Expert Mode te car
Description Performs the specified diagnostic or status test on a card or digroup.
If a previous test was performed on the card or digroup, the Operator
Interface displays the results of that test.
The card must be in either Enabled or Active state.
Parameters Card ID
Example 1. To test a card, enter the card ID.
2. Enter the type of test for a card.
3. Enter the test iteration.
4. To confirm task, enter either yes or no.
Enter command [TEST CARD]
< test car,c31
*** BX Card N7C31 Configuration (Cpu:C5) ***
DB Status: ENABLED * Slot Type: BX (Rev A)
Serial Number: 0
Status: OFFLINE
Domain : B Redundant BX: C30
Active Domain: A SX Port: C15P1
*** DIAGNOSTIC TEST TYPES ***
[ 0]* CANCEL TEST
[ 1] CBUS TEST
NOTE: * marks default selection.
Enter test type for card N7C31 [CANCEL TEST]
TEST TYPE = 1
Enter test iteration count (1-32767)
TEST ITERATIONS = 1
TEST on this card? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** Previous Test: None
Operator Interface Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 - 46 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
*** Command Complete ***
< test card,c15
*** SX-2 Card N7C15 Configuration (Cpu:C5) ***
DB Status: ENABLED * Slot Type: SX-2 (Rev G)
Serial Number: 1523266 Firmware Rev: D
Active Domain: A Status: OFFLINE
Domain: B Redundant SX: C0
*** System Components:
0> HSS 1> EXS 2> EXS 3> EXS
*** DIAGNOSTIC TEST TYPES ***
[ 0]* CANCEL TEST [ 4] TALK/LISTEN RAM [ 8] SX-2 NVRAM XSUM
[ 1] BACKGROUND RAM [ 5] SX POWERUP TEST
[ 2] RAM COMPARE TEST [ 6] SX-2 PICA TEST
[ 3] X RAM TEST [ 7] SX-2 TSP TEST
NOTE: * marks default selection.
Enter test type for card N7C15 [CANCEL TEST]
TEST TYPE = 0
CANCEL TEST on this card? [YES]
YES OR NO =
*** SX-2 Card N7C15: Test Not Running ***
*** Previous Test: None
*** Command Complete ***
See Also See the section on the SX and BX module.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Appendi x A
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 1
ACar d I nst al l at i on
This appendix describes installation and replacement procedures for
standard equipment cards in Promina 800 Series systems. This chapter
contains the following sections:
Module Installation Requirements on page A-2.
Promina 800 Card Installation on page A-3.
Interface Card Installation on page A-5.
Rear Interface Card Replacement on page A-9.
Front Card Installation on page A-10.
Front Card Replacement on page A-12.
Caution: Wear a grounding strap when handling cards to protect them from
static electricity damage.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Module Installation Requirements
Before you begin installation of any standard equipment modules, you
should be familiar with the concepts of load units and logical slots. A
brief description of each follows.
Load Units Load units measure the processing capacity of the Promina nodes
processor card. Load units provide a method of comparing available
processing power to the processing power requirements from other cards
in the system. If the number of load units required exceeds the available
load units, one or more additional processor cards will be needed.
Load unit requirements for standard equipment modules are provided in
this manual.
Logical Slots Logical slots are a means of measuring a modules backplane bandwidth
requirements. Logical slots must be calculated to determine if a given
configuration exceeds the logical slot constraints for a shelf.
Logical slot requirements for standard equipment modules are provided
in this manual.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 3
Promina 800 Card Installation
In a Promina 800, the interface cards must be installed before the front
cards to ensure proper connection in a shelf. To remove an interface card,
remove the front card first.
After the standard equipment cards are installed, they perform the
following:
PPM and PSMThe boot-up process runs a boot loader that
downloads a copy of the system code from mass storage (PSM disk).
During this process the Fault LED is on, and the numbered LEDs
light up in ascending order to indicate successful completion of
preliminary diagnostic tests. Information regarding completion of
other diagnostic tests is communicated to the console port. When the
Ethernet port is enabled, the Ethernet status LEDs will begin flashing.
When the system code has been properly initiated, the Fault LED
turns off. These preliminary diagnostic tests run in about two to four
seconds. The balance of the boot process (other diagnostic tests and
system code download) completes in a few minutes.
SX-2This card runs self tests to verify that it is functioning
properly. If the tests are successful, the Card Fault LED turns off.
BXThis card runs self tests to verify that it is functioning properly.
If the tests are successful, the Card Fault LED turns off.
If any card consistently fails the tests, call net.coms Technical
Assistance Center (TAC) or your technical support organization.
The standard equipment cards are installed and connected in a specific
manner for achieving the two-domain configuration in a Promina 800
node:
1. The SX-2 cards (on high-speed shelf 0) are installed in slot 0 (A
domain) and slot 15 (B domain). Redundant SX-2 cards are installed
in slot 1 (A domain) and slot 14 (B domain). Refer to Figure A-1 for
illustration of a nodal domain configuration with redundant SX-2
cards.
2. The A domain BX card is placed in the first slot on the left in an STS
or in the second slot from the right in an EXS. The B domain BX card
is installed adjacent to the A domain BX card.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure A-1 Two-Domain Configuration in the Promina 800
0 1
Power
Supply
2 3 14 15
STS (front view)
BX BX
T
R
K
2
SX-2 SX-2 SX-2 P
Q
A
S
D
16 17
H
S
D
-2
T3
HSS-2 (front view)
P
M
P
P
M
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
SX-2
P
S
M
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 5
Interface Card Installation
To access an interface card, open the rear cabinet door or remove the rear
access panel, depending on the Promina model installed.
Removing or installing the interface card is similar on all Promina
models, as shown in Figure A-2.
Note: The interface card in Figure A-2 shows thumbscrews securing the card;
some interface cards (such as the PPMI card) use slotted screws instead of
thumbscrews.
Installing an
Interface Card in
an HSS-2
The only interface cards to install in a high-speed shelf are the T3I, E3I,
SXI, SBI-2, and PPMI.
To install an interface card in a high-speed shelf:
Refer to Installing an Interface Card in an STS or an EXS on page A-5.
For PPMI cards, refer to Figure A-1 and connect the cabling as follows:
1. Internal Ethernet cables to each card
2. An Ethernet terminator to each open end of the internal Ethernet
3. If applicable, a serial cable to the Console port of the master PPMI
card
4. If applicable, an alarm panel cable to one of the PPMI cards
Installing an
Interface Card in
an STS or an EXS
To install an interface card in a standard shelf:
To access an interface card, open the rear cabinet door or remove the rear
access panel, depending on the Promina model installed.
Removing or installing the interface card is similar on all Promina
models, as shown in Figure A-2.
Note: The interface card in Figure A-2 shows thumbscrews securing the card;
some interface cards (such as the PPMI card) use slotted screws instead of
thumbscrews.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure A-2 Interface Card Installation
Always label cables and their connection points before disconnecting the
cables.
Use the Query Card command to verify that the slot is not configured for
another card type. Other operator interface commands used for installing
or replacing cards are Install Card/Port, Modify Card/Port, Query
Port, and Activate/Disable Card. For detailed information about using
these Operator Interface commands, see Chapter 8, Operator Interface
Commands.
To install an interface card:
1. Remove the rear cover plate of the slot that corresponds to the slot
where the front card will be installed.
2. Check that there are no front cards physically installed before
installing the interface card.
Caution: When inserting a card, do not force the card into place. If the card does
not seat easily, ensure the card is level with the card guides.
Interface Card
Thumbscrew
Cover Plate
Panel
Spring Punch-outs
Card Pulls
Cover Plate
Panels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 7
3. Insert the interface card.
4. Fasten the interface card securely.
5. Attach any necessary cables to the interface card. (For standard
equipment cables, refer to To install an interface card in a high-speed
shelf: on page A-5 or To install an interface card in a standard shelf:
on page A-5.)
6. Install the corresponding front card if appropriate (refer to Front Card
Installation on page A-10).
7. Check that any unused slots at the rear of an STS have a cover plate.
This is essential for maintaining proper air flow and emission control.
8. When front and interface card installation are complete, replace any
shelf or access panels. For a Promina 800, close the rear door of the
cabinet.
For the PSMI cards, refer to Figure A-3 and connect the cabling as
follows:
1. Internal Ethernet cables to each card.
2. An Ethernet terminator to the each open end of the internal Ethernet
in the internal network chain.
3. If applicable, an external Ethernet cable for connecting to an NMS
workstation or a LAN.
4. If applicable, a serial cable to the Console port of the online PSMI
card.
5. The serial cable from the nodal modem to the Auxiliary port of the
PSMI card. If the node has redundant PSMs, connect the Y cable to
the Auxiliary ports of both PSMI cards.
6. If applicable, an alarm panel cable to one of the PPMI cards.
Note: Before replacing a standard equipment card in a functioning node, make
sure the card is offline. Disable the domain of that card and disable the card
before removing.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure A-3 Cable Connections in the Promina 800
Auxiliary Port to
Internal Ethernet
Nodal Modem
Console Ports
External Ethernet
External Ethernet
PPM
Front Card
Interface Card
PSM
PPM
PPM
to Terminals
or Workstation
Console Port
to Terminals
or Workstation
Alarm
Interface
Front Card
Interface Card
NMS /LAN
Terminator
Terminator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 9
Rear Interface Card Replacement
If there is a cable connected to the interface card, label both the cable and
the connector before removing the card.
To replace an interface card:
1. Disable the front card using the Disable Card command.
2. Remove any cables from the interface card.
3. Unseat the front card.
4. Remove the interface card.
5. Transfer any jumper, switch settings, and labels to the new interface
card.
6. Insert the replacement interface card.
7. Reconnect the interface card cabling.
8. Reseat the front card.
9. Activate the front card using the Activate Card command.
When front and interface card replacement procedures are complete,
replace any shelf panels and close the front and rear doors of the cabinet.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 10 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Front Card Installation
EXS shelves have minimum load requirements for proper power supply
operation. If there are not enough cards installed in the shelf, power
supply problems can occur. Installing a minimum load board (MLB) in
the shelf can solve these problems.
Note: The 400W AC/DC power supply requires Minimum Load Board usage.
To install a front card:
1. Use the Query Card command to verify that the slot is not
configured for another card type.
2. If there is an interface card to be installed in the slot, install it first.
3. If applicable, make any jumper or switch settings on the front card.
Caution: When inserting a card, do not force the card in place. If the card does
not seat easily, ensure the card is level to the card guide.
4. Insert the card into the slot, ensuring that the top and bottom of the
card are correctly aligned with the card guides for the slot. (Figure
A-4.)
5. Seat the card within two to three seconds, so that power sequencing is
applied to the card. Ensure that the upper and lower ejector arms are
correctly latched to secure the card.
6. Configure the module through the Promina Operator Interface. Refer
to the appropriate module manual.
7. When front and interface card installation procedures are complete,
replace any shelf panels. For a Promina 800, close the front door of
the cabinet.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 11
Figure A-4 Front Card Installation
Card Guides
Ejector Arm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 12 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Front Card Replacement
To replace a front card:
1. Disable the card using the Disable Card command. The card must be
disabled before it is physically removed.
2. Remove the front card.
3. Transfer any jumper and switch settings to the new front card.
4. Insert the replacement card into the slot, ensuring that the top and
bottom of the card are correctly aligned with the card guides for the
slot. (Refer to Figure A-4.)
5. Seat the card within two to three seconds, so that power sequencing is
applied to the card.
6. Activate the card using the Activate Card command. The card begins
self tests.
7. When front and interface card replacement procedures are complete,
replace any shelf panels. For a Promina 800, close the front door of
the cabinet.
Cable Strain
Relief Bracket
AC Power
Cord
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 A - 13
Connecting
Interface Cards
Connect asynchronous terminal devices to the Console Port of the PLMI
card.
For Promina 400 and 200 nodes without a PSM, connect the nodal
modem to the auxiliary port. If the node has a redundant PLM, connect
the Y cable for the nodal modem to the auxiliary ports on both PLMI
cards.
For Promina 400 and 200 nodes with a PSM, connect the Internal
Ethernet cable between the internal Ethernet connectors on the PSMI card
and the PLMI card and connect the nodal modem to the auxiliary Port on
the PSMI card.
Installing Front
Cards
Refer to Front Card Installation on page A-10.
Before installing a PLM, set the Auto/Dsbl switch to Dsbl. After
installing a PLM, set the Auto/Dsbl switch to Auto.
Replacing Front
Cards
Refer to Front Card Replacement on page A-12.
If replacing a PLM, set the Auto/Dsbl switch to Dsbl. After installing a
PLM, set the Auto/Dsbl switch to Auto.
If you are replacing a redundant PLM, you can use the Switch PLM
command to force the spare card online, but it is not normally necessary
to do so.
Note: In a nonredundant system and without a PSM, the database is lost when
the PLM card is replaced.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A - 14 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Appendi x B
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 B - 1
BPanaVue Conf i gur at i on
f or HTC Por t Use
This appendix describes how to configure a PanaVue workstation for IP
connectivity to a Promina network where there is an ATM network
separating the PanaVue workstation from the Promina node to which it
needs IP access.
This chapter also describes the differences between typical PanaVue
configuration and this configuration which uses an HTC port on a
CellXpress module in the Promina node. The HTC port configuration
also requires that the PanaVue workstation has ATM network
connectivity.
Note: This appendix refers to PanaVue installation information provide in the
PanaVue Management Installation Guide.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Typical Ethernet-Based Configuration
The following diagram shows the typical PanaVue configuration. The
PanaVue workstation is on the same network (and preferably) subnet as
the external Ethernet interface of the PSM on the gateway node. An
internal Ethernet connects the PSM to the PPM on this node and the PPM
has access to all the other nodes in the Promina network via SSC and
SCLP connections. Figure B-1 shows this configuration:
Figure B-1 Typical Ethernet-Based PanaVue Configuration
The following procedure apply the IP connectivity portion only of the
PanaVue installation. IP connectivity is described in detail in the PanaVue
Management Installation Guide, Installing the PanaVue Base System.
To allow the PanaVue workstation to communicate with a Promina
network using IP over Ethernet alone:
1. Configure the external IP address of the PSM.
This connects the PSM to the network on which the PanaVue
workstation resides. In Figure B-1, Typical Ethernet-Based PanaVue
Configuration, this address is shown as 123.45.67.3. This is the
gateway address that the PanaVue workstation will use for its route
table.
See the PanaVue Management Installation Guide, IP Routing on
Promina 800 Series Nodes for more information.
Note: The PSM is given a valid IP address; usually meaning an IP address
that is on the same subnet as the PanaVue Workstation.
2. Configure IPA on the Promina Gateway node
Promina 800 Series
External
Ethernet
123.45.67.2
PSM
123.45.67.3
Promina
Network
PPM
CX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 B - 3
This installs IP routes on all the processors in the network so that they
know how to communicate with the PanaVue workstation. In the
example in Figure B-1, Typical Ethernet-Based PanaVue
Configuration, the IPA Host is shown as 123.45.67.2 and the IPA
gateway is shown as 123.45.67.3.
See the PanaVue Management Installation Guide, IP Routing on
Promina 800 Series Nodes for more information.
3. Configure routes on PanaVue workstation to the Promina network.
Each command installs an IP route on the PanaVue workstation so
that PanaVue knows how to reach the Promina network. In this case,
the commands would be:
route add net 10.0.0.0 123.45.67.3 2
route add net 11.0.0.0 123.45.67.3 2
These commands tell the workstation that to get to the 10.x.x.x and
11.x.x.x networks, it must send IP packets to the PSM on the gateway
node.
Note: The IP addresses show a default Promina IP addressing scheme.
Depending on the specific configuration of your Promina nodes, these
addresses may be different where the 10 and 11 are replaced with n and
n+1.
See the PanaVue Management Installation Guide, Configuring
OpenViews SNMP Parameters" for more detail information.
When these steps are completed successfully, the PanaVue workstation
will be able to communicate with all nodes in the Promina network.
HTC Configuration In the HTC Configuration shown in Figure B-2, HTC PanaVue
Configuration, the gateway node is no longer on the same Ethernet as the
PanaVue workstation. Instead there is an ATM network separating them.
The Promina node is connected to the ATM network via a CX card and
the PanaVue workstation is connected with a router connected to both an
Ethernet and ATM network. This is also shown in Figure B-2.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Figure B-2 HTC PanaVue Configuration
To allow the PanaVue workstation to communicate with a Promina
network using IP over Ethernet and ATM follow these steps:
1. Configure the HTC port
This will connect the PPM to the CX with an HDLC connection that
can carry IP traffic. The HTC port configuration is shown in Figure
B-2.
The IP address that is used for the HTC port is unrelated to the IP
address of the PanaVue workstation. This is important so that the
router may be configured to route IP datagrams properly for the HTC
connection. The IP addresses that are shown in Figure B-2 in the
192.168.0.0 subnet are good examples, since they are reserved for
private networks and are not likely to conflict with IP subnets already
in a customers network. Although this choice of HTC IP address is
not mandatory, it is recommended.
Note: If there is another PSM on the gateway node (i.e. node with the HTC port)
and its external Ethernet is active, the IP address of the HTC port can not be in
the same subnet as the PSM external Ethernet IP address, or the route tables in
the Promina network will be corrupted.
Example B-1 shows an example HTC port configuration.
Promina 800 Series
CellXpress
Ethernet
123.45.67.2
PPM
123.45.67.1
X
ATM
Network
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
(PPM HTC
port address)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 B - 5
Example B-1 Configuring an HTC Port
Enter NORMAL to return to normal command mode.
Enter command [INSTALL PORT]
< mod po,c2p0/y

*** Port N35C2P0 must be disabled first.
*** PPM Port N35C2P0 has been DISABLED.


*** PPM Port N35C2P0 Configuration Parameters ***
[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ORIG-ONLY (Dest Bundle is ANS-ONLY)
[ 1] Destination Bundle = N35C18B1 (Dest Bundle is CX)
[ 2] Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 3] Sec Call/Preempt Priority (Call= 7; Preempt= 0 )
[ 4] Port Type = HTC
[ 5] Port Speed = 64000 bps (Dest Bundle is 64000)
[ 7] Routing Options (TER=DONT CARE; ENC=DONT CARE; FIB=DONT
CARE)
[12] IP Address = 192.168.1.2
[13] Master Only = NO

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =
The destination CX bundle configuration is also shown in Example B-2.
Example B-2 Destination CX Bundle Configuration
Enter NORMAL to return to normal command mode.
Enter command [MODIFY PORT]
< mod bun,c18b1/y

*** BUNDLE N35C18B1 must be disabled first.

*** configuration parameters for CX VBR Port Bundle N35C18B1 ***

[ 0] Orig/Ans Mode = ans-only
[ 9] VPI/VCI = (41,41)
[12] Span ID = 0
[13] Peak Data Rate= 64K
[15] Sus Data Rate= 64K
[16] Max Burst Time= 0.2s
[20] Port Mode = HDLC
[22] CLP Mode = NO
[24] Error Statistics Interval (min) = 15
[27] Cell Rate Mode = GCRA Max
[28] Average Frame Length (byte) = 87

Enter parameter index (or hit RETURN to continue)
PARAMETER INDEX =


Are all parameters correct? [YES]
YES OR NO =

*** VBR Port bundle N35C18B1 has been ACTIVATED.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
2. Configure IPA on the Promina Gateway node.
This installs IP routes on all the processors in the network so that they
know how to communicate with the PanaVue workstation. In this
example, the IPA Host would be 123.45.67.2 and the IPA gateway
would be 192.168.1.2. Although the address for the host is the same,
it is using the HTC port instead of the PSM as the gateway to reach
the PanaVue workstation.
Note: It is a recommended that the label of the IPA include the characters
"HTC" to indicate to the user that this is an IPA in support of an HTC port. This
will avoid confusion between HTC and "standard" IPA on a node.
See the PanaVue Management Installation Guide, IP Routing on
Promina 800 Series Nodes for detailed information.
3. Configure route on PanaVue workstation to Promina network - This
installs an IP route on the PanaVue workstation so that it knows how
to reach the Promina network. In this case, the command would be:
route add net 10.0.0.0 123.45.67.1 2
route add net 11.0.0.0 123.45.67.1 2
Here we are specifying the router as the gateway to the Promina
network instead of the PSM. That is because it is via the router that
the workstation gains access to the 10.x.x.x and 11.x.x.x networks.
See the PanaVue Management Installation Guide, IP Routing on
Promina 800 Series Nodes for detailed information.
4. Configure the PVC in ATM network.
This is the last element in the connection. This will connect the VC
on the CX to the VC on the router. The VPI/VCI for the PVC
connection must agree with those configured on both the CX bundle
and the router, or it will not work (in this case 41/41).
Note: Use the VPI/VCI values provided by your Service Provider.
5. Configure routes on the ATM router.
Configure the router so that it installs an ATM PVC and knows how
to route packets between PanaVue and Promina. It is assumed that
the router being used is made by Cisco and that it is already
configured on both the Ethernet and ATM networks. A sample
configuration is provided in Example B-3.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 B - 7
Example B-3 Cisco Router Configuration
7500# wr t
...
interface Ethernet1/1
ip address 123.45.67.1 255.255.255.0
no ip mroute-cache
!

interface ATM6/0/0.10 multipoint
mtu 1500
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
pvc 41/41
protocol ip 192.168.1.2 broadcast
encapsulation aal5mux ip
!
!
...
ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.1.2 2
ip route 11.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 192.168.1.2 2
The added lines of interest start at PVC 41/41. This sets up a single
PVC which corresponds to the CX VBR port bundle. The protocol
ip line below that specifies the IP address of the HTC port, whose
data will be carried in this PVC. Lastly, the encapsulation line
specifies that IP packets will be sent using VCMUX encapsulation,
which is compatible with the HDLC setting of the CX bundle used
by the HTC port.
The other configuration required for the router is static routes that tell
the router to send IP packets with a destination address in 10.x.x.x or
11.x.x.x networks to the interface which is connected to the HTC
port.
When this procedure is complete, the PanaVue workstation is configured
to communicate with all nodes in the Promina network.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Index -1
I ndex
#
250 W power supply
autoranging 7-3
description 7-2 to 7-5
LEDs 7-4
maximum output currents 7-5
part numbers 7-3
power factor correction 7-2
specifications 7-5
400 W power supply
autoranging 7-6
description 7-5 to 7-9
LEDs 7-8
maximum output currents 7-9
part numbers 7-6
power factor correction 7-5
specifications 7-9
A
activate
bundle/card/port/xport 8-4, 8-6
domain 8-5
active domain
SBI card 4-22
SX-2 card 4-20
active domain field 4-20
alarm panel
Promina 800 6-50
alarm panel assembly 7-25
alarm panel interface field 4-12
alarm panel-2
connections 7-26 to 7-27
front panel 7-26
LEDs 7-26
alarm/monitor interface parameter 4-6
auxiliary baud rate parameter 4-7
auxiliary port configuration field 4-12
B
backplane
expansion shelf 6-27
EXS jumper strap 6-28
high speed shelf 6-19
standard shelf 6-25
STS jumper strap 6-26
baud rate parameter 4-7, 4-9
baud speed 7-29
BTU output 6-29
bundles
activate 8-4, 8-6
delete 8-10
install 8-18
bus terminator 7-23
Promina 800 3-18
BX 6-17, 6-58
BX card
front panel 3-10
interface 3-12
query configuration 4-22
self tests A-3
slot requirements 2-5
BX card installation A-3
BXI card 3-12
bytes of RAM left field 4-12
C
cabinet
EMI 6-9
non-EMI 6-9
cabinet equipment
optional 6-15, 6-16
cabinet weights 6-8
cabinet-mount 6-9
cable
null modem 7-29
RJ-45 7-28, 7-29
cal state
Idle/Down 5-19
call configuration 1-5
call priority field 5-19
call state 5-19
Placing/Down 5-19
Up/Align Up 5-19
Up/Down 5-19
Up/In Align 5-19
Up/Out Align 5-19
Up/Proving 5-19
Up/Up 5-19
Verify/Down 5-19
call/preempt priority parameter 5-8, 5-15
cancel
test 8-7
card
activate 8-4, 8-6
delete 8-10
install 8-18
card installation
common equipment A-1
interface card HSS-2 A-5
interface card STS or EXS A-5
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index - 2 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
Promina 800 A-3
requirements A-2
card parameters
common equipment modules 4-6
card status field 5-20
card type field 5-20
CBus interrupts/sec field 4-12
chassis weights 6-7
circuit breakers
100 to 240 V AC PDU 6-49
-48 to -60 V DC PDU 6-45
clock source
overview 2-10
code version field 4-12
common equipment
BX card A-3
card installation A-1, A-2
card parameters 4-6
EXS 6-60
external connectivity 2-6
install card in database 4-2
installing a BX A-3
installing a PPM A-3
installing a PSM A-3
installing a SX-2 A-3
interface card installation A-5
internal connectivity 2-6
Promina 800 6-53 to 6-54
Promina 800 card installation A-3
software configuration 4-2
STS
bus terminator 6-58
BX 6-58
SX-2 card A-3
compatibility 1-4
configuration specifications
bandwidth 6-4
logical slots 6-4
modules 6-4
processing capability 6-4
Promina 800 6-4
Promina processor module 6-4
shelves 6-4
configuring console ports 4-24
console baud rate parameter 4-7
console port configuration field 4-12
console ports 4-24
conventions used in this document iii-xv
coprocessor CPU status 4-13
CPU restart count field 4-13
CPU status field 4-13
current GMT field 4-13
D
data port module 6-5
database field 4-19
DB checksum field 4-13
DB status field 4-13
BX 4-22
SX-2 4-20
DC power 6-46
delete
bundle/card/port 8-10
PSM 8-12
destination port parameter 5-8, 5-15, 5-20
dial-in access modem
description 3-19
dimensions
cabinet 6-8
chassis 6-7
disable
domain 8-14
signaling trace 8-16
disabled CPU status 4-13
domain 6-56, 6-57
activate 8-5
disable 8-14
switch 8-43
domain field
BX 4-22
SBI card 4-20
domain permit map
install 8-20
E
electrical specifications 6-6
encry routing field 5-20
environmental specifications 6-6
ethernet port 6-57, 6-58
expansion shelf 6-15, 6-27, 8-37
installing BX and PSM cards 2-5
system components 4-21
EXS 6-15, 6-60
See also expansion shelf
EXS, see expansion shelf
external IP field 4-8, 4-14, 4-19
F
fan tray assembly
alarm panel 6-50, 7-11
auxiliary fan 6-50
intake 6-51
jackfield 6-51, 7-11
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Index - 3
fault LED A-3
feature modules
data modules 6-59
PX modules 6-59
trunk modules 6-59
voice modules 6-59
fiber routing field 5-20
firmware revision field
SX-2 4-21
floor space requirements 6-11
front card 6-19, 6-25, 6-27
installation Promina 200 & 400 A-13
replacement Promina 200 & 400 A-13
front card installation A-10
front card replacement A-12
front panel
BX 3-10
PPM 3-3
PSM 3-14
SX-2 3-6
fuses 6-45
G
gateway IP address field 4-14
ground cable 6-14
H
hardware features
debug port 1-5
disk drive storage 1-5
ethernet ports 1-5
memory 1-5
non-volatile storage 1-5
real time clock 1-5
serial ports 1-5
high speed shelf 6-18
high-speed shelf 8-37
installing PPM and SX-2 cards 2-5
interface card installation A-5
system components field 4-21
hot insertion 6-19, 6-21
HSS, see high-speed shelf
HSS-2 6-15
See also high speed shelf
HTC
port installation 5-11
port parameters 5-14
HTC port 5-11
hunt group
query 8-32
HW revision field 4-14
HW serial number field 4-14
I
idle time field 4-14
install
bundle 8-18
card/port 8-18
domain permit map 8-20
PSM 8-21
SNMP 8-34
install card in database 4-2
installation
adding SSC channels for additional network band-
width 5-5, 5-11
HTC port 5-11
SSC port 5-5
installed port field 5-20
installing a front card A-10
installing an interface card A-5
common equipment A-5
int IP addr field 4-14, 4-19
interface card
connection Promina 200 & 400 A-13
interface card installation A-5
interface card replacement A-9
interface cards
BX 3-12
SXI-2 3-8
interfaces
data terminal equipment 1-5
receiving equipment 1-5
video transmittal 1-5
voice equipment 1-5
internal IP address field 4-14
INTU-558W 7-32
IP only parameter
SSC 5-10
IP, adding SSC channels 5-5, 5-11
IPLM card
query configuration 4-10
SCLP/SSC ports description 5-1
J
jackfield 7-11, 7-24
L
last disconnect
call blocked 5-20
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index - 4 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
dest busy 5-20
dest error 5-20
dest timeout 5-20
duplicate call 5-20
hang up 5-20
invalid task address 5-20
no path 5-21
task timeout 5-21
tbus fault 5-21
timeout on charge pkt 5-21
last disconnect field 5-20
link cost routing 5-7, 5-15
link status
aligning 5-21
down 5-21
idle 5-21
SSC 5-21
up 5-21
links 1-3
load unit
modules 7-17
Promina 800 6-4
load units 4-14, A-2
local IP parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-14
logical connection 1-3
logical slots A-2
module requirements 7-18 to 7-20
Promina 800 6-5
M
MAC addr field 4-15, 4-19
mass storage, See disk drive storage
master CPU status 4-13, 4-15
maximum link cost routing 5-7, 5-15
memory
PPM module 3-2
minimum load board 7-21 to 7-23
modem
dial-in access 3-19
Y cable 3-19
modify
PSM 8-25, 8-34
module power consumption 6-29, 7-13 to 7-15
MTU Size parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-15
multiservice access platform 1-1
multiservice backbone network 1-1
N
N.E.T. network 1-3
network management 1-6
nodal controller 5-2
processor 5-2
nonredundant configuration 7-5
not present CPU status 4-13
number of installed SSC ports field 4-15
O
operator interface 1-6, 7-21
operator interface commands
activate bundle/card/port/xport 8-4, 8-6
activate domain 8-5
cancel test 8-7
delete bundle/card/port 8-10
delete PSM 8-12
disable domain 8-14
disable signaling trace 8-16
install bundle 8-18
install card/port 8-18
install domain permit map 8-20
install PSM 8-21
install SNMP 8-34
modify PSM 8-25, 8-34
query hunt group 8-32
query system components 8-37
switch domain 8-43
orig/ans mode field 5-21
orig/ans mode parameter 5-7, 5-15
over current shut down 7-2, 7-6
P
pass-through timing 7-32
PDU 6-30
100 to 240 V AC dual feed 6-30, 6-38 to 6-41
See also power distribution unit
-48 and -60 V DC dual feed 6-30, 6-30 to 6-36
HSS-2
100 to 240 V AC dual feed 6-42, 6-43 to 6-44
-48 and -60 V DC dual feed 6-42 to 6-43
STS
100 to 240 V AC dual feed 6-49
-48 and -60 V DC single/dual feed 6-44 to 6-48
perm boot version field 4-15
PFC, See power factor correction
pkts recvd field 5-21
pkts sent field 5-21
PLM
configure ports 4-24
install in database 4-4
query configuration 4-10
SCLP/SSC port configuration displays 5-18
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Index - 5
SCLP/SSC ports description 5-1
port
activate 8-4, 8-6
delete 8-10
install 8-18
port configuration descriptions
SCLP/SSC 5-19
port speed 7-20 to 7-21
port speed parameter 5-9, 5-21
port speeds
console port 4-24
port status field 5-21
port type field 5-22
port type parameter 5-9, 5-15
power distribution unit 6-30
power factor correction 7-2, 7-5
power supplies
Promina 800 6-29
Promina systems 7-2
power up field 4-15
PPM
configure ports 4-24
front panel 3-3
front panel indicators 3-3
install in database 4-3
installation A-3
master and coprocessor 3-3
memory 3-2
module description 3-2
query configuration 4-10
SCLP/SSC port configuration displays 5-18
SCLP/SSC ports description 5-1
PPM, See Promina processor module
PPMI
connectors 3-5
description 3-5
PPP
baud rate parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-15
local IP parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-14
MTU Size parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-15
on aux Port parameter 4-6
on aux port parameter 4-8
remote IP parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-15
tyCo device parameter 4-7, 4-9
PPP baud rate parameter 4-15
PPP on aux Port parameter 4-6
PPP on aux port parameter 4-8
PRC card
query hunt group 8-32
preempt prty field 5-22
processing capability 6-4
processor
nodal controller 5-2
Promina 200
software configuration 4-2
Promina 200 & 400
redundancy 2-10
Promina 400
software configuration 4-2
Promina 800
250 W power supply 6-29
400 W power supply 6-29
bus terminator 3-18
BXI card 3-12
card installation A-3
common equipment 6-53 to 6-54
common equipment modules 3-2
configuration specifications 6-4
configurations 2-4
EXS configuration 6-2
load unit 6-4
nonredundant configuration 6-3
nonredundant configurations 2-8
PPM 3-2
PPMI 3-5
PSM 3-13
PSMI card 3-16
QAVP 6-38, 6-45
query system components 8-37
redundant configuration 6-3
SBI 3-10
software configuration 4-2
STS configuration 6-2
switch domain 8-43
SX-2 module 3-6
SXI-2 3-8
Promina controller modules
overview 2-3
Promina node 1-2, 1-3, 1-4
Promina processor module 6-4, 6-57
Promina processor modules
overview 2-3
Promina server module 6-58
Promina SSC channels 5-5, 5-11
Promina800
common equipment redundancy 2-7
shelf configurations 2-4
PSM
card configuration descriptions 4-19
card query displays 4-10
configure ports 4-24
database field 4-19
delete 8-12
description 3-13
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index - 6 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
disk mirroring 3-14
front panel indicators 3-14
install 8-21
install in database 4-2, 4-5
int IP addr field 4-19
int IP field 4-14
MAC address field 4-15, 4-19
modify 8-25, 8-34
PSM code field 4-19
PSM interface menu 4-18
redundancy 3-13
status field 4-16, 4-19
PSM assigned cardID parameter 4-8
PSM card ID field 4-15
PSM code field 4-19
PSM installation A-3
PSM, See Promina server module
PSMI
description 3-16
Q
QAVP
power supply 6-50, 7-10 to 7-11
Promina 800 6-38, 6-45
query
hunt group 8-32
system components 8-37
query configuration displays 4-10
query operator console 4-24
query PSM
displays 4-18
R
rack-mount 6-9
rack-mount space 6-9
RAM 6-4
rear interface card 6-19 to 6-20, 6-25, 6-27
redundancy
Promina 400/200 2-10
SX-2 3-6
redundant BX field 4-23
redundant configuration 7-5
redundant SX field 4-21
remote IP parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-15
replacing a front card A-12
replacing an interface card A-9
reserved card slots 6-55
See also slot restrictions
restart field 4-16
Restart PSM 8-42
RJ-45 cable 7-28, 7-29
routing options parameter 5-9, 5-16
routing, maximum link cost 5-7, 5-15
RS-232C 7-28, 7-29
RTC overruns field 4-16
S
SBI card
active domain 4-22
description 3-10
domain field 4-20
SBI, See shelf bus interface
SCLP/SSC 5-20
call priority field 5-19
call state field 5-19
card status field 5-20
card type field 5-20
configuration descriptions 5-19
destination port field 5-20
encry routing field 5-20
fiber routing field 5-20
installed port field 5-20
link status field 5-21
orig/ans mode field 5-21
orig/ans mode parameter 5-7, 5-15
pkts recvd field 5-21
pkts sent field 5-21
port query configuration displays 5-18
port speed field 5-21
port status field 5-21
port type field 5-22
ports description 5-1
preempt prty field 5-22
secondary call priority field 5-22
secondary preempt priority field 5-22
terr routing field 5-22
secondary call priority parameter 5-9, 5-15, 5-22
secondary preempt priority parameter 5-9, 5-15,
5-22
selected path parameter 5-9, 5-16
selected path required parameter
SSC 5-10, 5-16
serial number field 4-16
BX 4-22
SX-2 4-21
serial port 6-58
serial port interface 7-28 to 7-32
serial port pinouts 7-29
shelf bus interface 3-10, 7-23
shelf numbering 6-16
shelves 8-37
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Index - 7
BTU output 7-12
configuration 6-15
EXS 6-15
HSS-2 6-15
STS 6-15
wattage 7-12
signaling trace
disable 8-16
slot numbering
Promina 800 6-17
slot requirements
BX 2-5
SX-2 2-5
slot restrictions 6-17
slot type field 4-16
BX 4-22
SX-2 4-21
SNMP
install 8-34
software configuration 4-2
spigot 6-16
SSC
call/preempt priority parameter 5-8, 5-15
channels 5-5, 5-11
destination port parameter 5-8, 5-15
IP only parameter 5-10
port installation 5-5
port parameters 5-7, 5-14
port speed parameter 5-9
port type parameter 5-9, 5-15
PPM, PLM, and IPLM configurations 5-18
routing options parameter 5-9, 5-16
secondary call priority parameter 5-9, 5-15
secondary Preempt priority parameter 5-9, 5-15
selected path parameter 5-9, 5-16
selected path required parameter 5-10, 5-16
SSC port parameters
routing options
dont care 5-9
prefer not 5-9
preferred 5-9
required 5-9
standard shelf 6-15, 6-22, 8-37
installing BX and PSM cards 2-5
system components 4-21
status field 4-19
BX 4-23
PSM 4-16
SX-2 4-21
status indicators
BX 3-10
PPM 3-3
PSM 3-14
SX-2 3-6
STS 6-15
See also standard shelf
STS, see standard shelf
subnet mask parameter 4-8, 4-16
switch
domain 8-43
SX-2 6-17
card installation A-3
configuration 2-5
DB status field 4-20
description 3-6
front panel 3-6
front panel indicators 3-6
interface 3-8
port field BX 4-23
query configuration 4-20
redundancy 3-6
self tests A-3
slot requirements 2-5
status 4-21
SXI-2 3-8
connectors 3-8
synchronous timing 7-32
system components
query 8-37
system components field 4-21
system output 6-29
system power 6-29
system redundancy 6-56
T
T3-TRK card
system components 8-37
TA, See trunk asynchronous
task distribution information 4-16
task restart count field 4-17
TCP/IP
adding SSC channels for additional network band-
width 5-5, 5-11
terminal block 6-46
terminal block jumpers 6-47
terr routing field 5-22
test
cancel 8-7
timing sources
Promina 800/400/200 2-10
transparent signaling overhead 7-32
trunk 1-3
trunk asynchronous 7-32
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index - 8 Promina 800 Series Release 3.x3 Promina 800 Installation and Maintenance
trunk bandwidth 7-32
tyCo device parameter 4-7, 4-9, 4-17
W
weights
cabinet 6-8
chassis 6-7
wrt boot version field 4-17
X
xport
activate 8-4, 8-6
Y
Y cable
connecting 3-19

You might also like